diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation')
196 files changed, 4307 insertions, 1101 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/00-INDEX b/Documentation/00-INDEX index 8dfc6708a257..f607367e642f 100644 --- a/Documentation/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/00-INDEX @@ -328,8 +328,6 @@ sysrq.txt - info on the magic SysRq key. telephony/ - directory with info on telephony (e.g. voice over IP) support. -time_interpolators.txt - - info on time interpolators. uml/ - directory with information about User Mode Linux. unicode.txt @@ -346,8 +344,6 @@ vm/ - directory with info on the Linux vm code. volatile-considered-harmful.txt - Why the "volatile" type class should not be used -voyager.txt - - guide to running Linux on the Voyager architecture. w1/ - directory with documents regarding the 1-wire (w1) subsystem. watchdog/ diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-backlight b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-backlight index 4d637e1c4ff7..70302f370e7e 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-backlight +++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-backlight @@ -34,3 +34,23 @@ Contact: Richard Purdie <rpurdie@rpsys.net> Description: Maximum brightness for <backlight>. Users: HAL + +What: /sys/class/backlight/<backlight>/type +Date: September 2010 +KernelVersion: 2.6.37 +Contact: Matthew Garrett <mjg@redhat.com> +Description: + The type of interface controlled by <backlight>. + "firmware": The driver uses a standard firmware interface + "platform": The driver uses a platform-specific interface + "raw": The driver controls hardware registers directly + + In the general case, when multiple backlight + interfaces are available for a single device, firmware + control should be preferred to platform control should + be preferred to raw control. Using a firmware + interface reduces the probability of confusion with + the hardware and the OS independently updating the + backlight state. Platform interfaces are mostly a + holdover from pre-standardisation of firmware + interfaces. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-firmware-efi-vars b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-firmware-efi-vars new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5def20b9019e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-firmware-efi-vars @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +What: /sys/firmware/efi/vars +Date: April 2004 +Contact: Matt Domsch <Matt_Domsch@dell.com> +Description: + This directory exposes interfaces for interactive with + EFI variables. For more information on EFI variables, + see 'Variable Services' in the UEFI specification + (section 7.2 in specification version 2.3 Errata D). + + In summary, EFI variables are named, and are classified + into separate namespaces through the use of a vendor + GUID. They also have an arbitrary binary value + associated with them. + + The efivars module enumerates these variables and + creates a separate directory for each one found. Each + directory has a name of the form "<key>-<vendor guid>" + and contains the following files: + + attributes: A read-only text file enumerating the + EFI variable flags. Potential values + include: + + EFI_VARIABLE_NON_VOLATILE + EFI_VARIABLE_BOOTSERVICE_ACCESS + EFI_VARIABLE_RUNTIME_ACCESS + EFI_VARIABLE_HARDWARE_ERROR_RECORD + EFI_VARIABLE_AUTHENTICATED_WRITE_ACCESS + + See the EFI documentation for an + explanation of each of these variables. + + data: A read-only binary file that can be read + to attain the value of the EFI variable + + guid: The vendor GUID of the variable. This + should always match the GUID in the + variable's name. + + raw_var: A binary file that can be read to obtain + a structure that contains everything + there is to know about the variable. + For structure definition see "struct + efi_variable" in the kernel sources. + + This file can also be written to in + order to update the value of a variable. + For this to work however, all fields of + the "struct efi_variable" passed must + match byte for byte with the structure + read out of the file, save for the value + portion. + + **Note** the efi_variable structure + read/written with this file contains a + 'long' type that may change widths + depending on your underlying + architecture. + + size: As ASCII representation of the size of + the variable's value. + + + In addition, two other magic binary files are provided + in the top-level directory and are used for adding and + removing variables: + + new_var: Takes a "struct efi_variable" and + instructs the EFI firmware to create a + new variable. + + del_var: Takes a "struct efi_variable" and + instructs the EFI firmware to remove any + variable that has a matching vendor GUID + and variable key name. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-spear-pcie-gadget b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-spear-pcie-gadget new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..875988146a63 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-spear-pcie-gadget @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +What: /config/pcie-gadget +Date: Feb 2011 +KernelVersion: 2.6.37 +Contact: Pratyush Anand <pratyush.anand@st.com> +Description: + + Interface is used to configure selected dual mode PCIe controller + as device and then program its various registers to configure it + as a particular device type. + This interfaces can be used to show spear's PCIe device capability. + + Nodes are only visible when configfs is mounted. To mount configfs + in /config directory use: + # mount -t configfs none /config/ + + For nth PCIe Device Controller + /config/pcie-gadget.n/ + link ... used to enable ltssm and read its status. + int_type ...used to configure and read type of supported + interrupt + no_of_msi ... used to configure number of MSI vector needed and + to read no of MSI granted. + inta ... write 1 to assert INTA and 0 to de-assert. + send_msi ... write MSI vector to be sent. + vendor_id ... used to write and read vendor id (hex) + device_id ... used to write and read device id (hex) + bar0_size ... used to write and read bar0_size + bar0_address ... used to write and read bar0 mapped area in hex. + bar0_rw_offset ... used to write and read offset of bar0 where + bar0_data will be written or read. + bar0_data ... used to write and read data at bar0_rw_offset. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/pstore b/Documentation/ABI/testing/pstore new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ddf451ee2a08 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/pstore @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +Where: /dev/pstore/... +Date: March 2011 +Kernel Version: 2.6.39 +Contact: tony.luck@intel.com +Description: Generic interface to platform dependent persistent storage. + + Platforms that provide a mechanism to preserve some data + across system reboots can register with this driver to + provide a generic interface to show records captured in + the dying moments. In the case of a panic the last part + of the console log is captured, but other interesting + data can also be saved. + + # mount -t pstore -o kmsg_bytes=8000 - /dev/pstore + + $ ls -l /dev/pstore + total 0 + -r--r--r-- 1 root root 7896 Nov 30 15:38 dmesg-erst-1 + + Different users of this interface will result in different + filename prefixes. Currently two are defined: + + "dmesg" - saved console log + "mce" - architecture dependent data from fatal h/w error + + Once the information in a file has been read, removing + the file will signal to the underlying persistent storage + device that it can reclaim the space for later re-use. + + $ rm /dev/pstore/dmesg-erst-1 + + The expectation is that all files in /dev/pstore + will be saved elsewhere and erased from persistent store + soon after boot to free up space ready for the next + catastrophe. + + The 'kmsg_bytes' mount option changes the target amount of + data saved on each oops/panic. Pstore saves (possibly + multiple) files based on the record size of the underlying + persistent storage until at least this amount is reached. + Default is 10 Kbytes. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci index f979d825d112..36bf454ba855 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci @@ -145,9 +145,11 @@ Date: July 2010 Contact: Narendra K <narendra_k@dell.com>, linux-bugs@dell.com Description: Reading this attribute will provide the firmware - given name(SMBIOS type 41 string) of the PCI device. - The attribute will be created only if the firmware - has given a name to the PCI device. + given name (SMBIOS type 41 string or ACPI _DSM string) of + the PCI device. The attribute will be created only + if the firmware has given a name to the PCI device. + ACPI _DSM string name will be given priority if the + system firmware provides SMBIOS type 41 string also. Users: Userspace applications interested in knowing the firmware assigned name of the PCI device. @@ -157,12 +159,27 @@ Date: July 2010 Contact: Narendra K <narendra_k@dell.com>, linux-bugs@dell.com Description: Reading this attribute will provide the firmware - given instance(SMBIOS type 41 device type instance) - of the PCI device. The attribute will be created - only if the firmware has given a device type instance - to the PCI device. + given instance (SMBIOS type 41 device type instance) of the + PCI device. The attribute will be created only if the firmware + has given an instance number to the PCI device. Users: Userspace applications interested in knowing the firmware assigned device type instance of the PCI device that can help in understanding the firmware intended order of the PCI device. + +What: /sys/bus/pci/devices/.../acpi_index +Date: July 2010 +Contact: Narendra K <narendra_k@dell.com>, linux-bugs@dell.com +Description: + Reading this attribute will provide the firmware + given instance (ACPI _DSM instance number) of the PCI device. + The attribute will be created only if the firmware has given + an instance number to the PCI device. ACPI _DSM instance number + will be given priority if the system firmware provides SMBIOS + type 41 device type instance also. +Users: + Userspace applications interested in knowing the + firmware assigned instance number of the PCI + device that can help in understanding the firmware + intended order of the PCI device. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-rbd b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-rbd index 90a87e2a572b..fa72ccb2282e 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-rbd +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-rbd @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ What: /sys/bus/rbd/ Date: November 2010 -Contact: Yehuda Sadeh <yehuda@hq.newdream.net>, +Contact: Yehuda Sadeh <yehuda@newdream.net>, Sage Weil <sage@newdream.net> Description: diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-mmc b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-mmc new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5a50ab655843 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-mmc @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +What: /sys/devices/.../mmc_host/mmcX/mmcX:XXXX/enhanced_area_offset +Date: January 2011 +Contact: Chuanxiao Dong <chuanxiao.dong@intel.com> +Description: + Enhanced area is a new feature defined in eMMC4.4 standard. + eMMC4.4 or later card can support such feature. This kind of + area can help to improve the card performance. If the feature + is enabled, this attribute will indicate the start address of + enhanced data area. If not, this attribute will be -EINVAL. + Unit Byte. Format decimal. + +What: /sys/devices/.../mmc_host/mmcX/mmcX:XXXX/enhanced_area_size +Date: January 2011 +Contact: Chuanxiao Dong <chuanxiao.dong@intel.com> +Description: + Enhanced area is a new feature defined in eMMC4.4 standard. + eMMC4.4 or later card can support such feature. This kind of + area can help to improve the card performance. If the feature + is enabled, this attribute will indicate the size of enhanced + data area. If not, this attribute will be -EINVAL. + Unit KByte. Format decimal. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power index 7628cd1bc36a..8ffbc25376a0 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power @@ -29,9 +29,8 @@ Description: "disabled" to it. For the devices that are not capable of generating system wakeup - events this file contains "\n". In that cases the user space - cannot modify the contents of this file and the device cannot be - enabled to wake up the system. + events this file is not present. In that case the device cannot + be enabled to wake up the system from sleep states. What: /sys/devices/.../power/control Date: January 2009 @@ -85,7 +84,7 @@ Description: The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_count attribute contains the number of signaled wakeup events associated with the device. This attribute is read-only. If the device is not enabled to wake up - the system from sleep states, this attribute is empty. + the system from sleep states, this attribute is not present. What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_active_count Date: September 2010 @@ -95,7 +94,7 @@ Description: number of times the processing of wakeup events associated with the device was completed (at the kernel level). This attribute is read-only. If the device is not enabled to wake up the - system from sleep states, this attribute is empty. + system from sleep states, this attribute is not present. What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_hit_count Date: September 2010 @@ -105,7 +104,8 @@ Description: number of times the processing of a wakeup event associated with the device might prevent the system from entering a sleep state. This attribute is read-only. If the device is not enabled to - wake up the system from sleep states, this attribute is empty. + wake up the system from sleep states, this attribute is not + present. What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_active Date: September 2010 @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Description: or 0, depending on whether or not a wakeup event associated with the device is being processed (1). This attribute is read-only. If the device is not enabled to wake up the system from sleep - states, this attribute is empty. + states, this attribute is not present. What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_total_time_ms Date: September 2010 @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Description: the total time of processing wakeup events associated with the device, in milliseconds. This attribute is read-only. If the device is not enabled to wake up the system from sleep states, - this attribute is empty. + this attribute is not present. What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_max_time_ms Date: September 2010 @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Description: the maximum time of processing a single wakeup event associated with the device, in milliseconds. This attribute is read-only. If the device is not enabled to wake up the system from sleep - states, this attribute is empty. + states, this attribute is not present. What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_last_time_ms Date: September 2010 @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Description: signaling the last wakeup event associated with the device, in milliseconds. This attribute is read-only. If the device is not enabled to wake up the system from sleep states, this - attribute is empty. + attribute is not present. What: /sys/devices/.../power/autosuspend_delay_ms Date: September 2010 diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b6490e14fe83 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +What: For USB devices : /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/report_descriptor + For BT devices : /sys/class/bluetooth/hci<addr>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/report_descriptor + Symlink : /sys/class/hidraw/hidraw<num>/device/report_descriptor +Date: Jan 2011 +KernelVersion: 2.0.39 +Contact: Alan Ott <alan@signal11.us> +Description: When read, this file returns the device's raw binary HID + report descriptor. + This file cannot be written. +Users: HIDAPI library (http://www.signal11.us/oss/hidapi) diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-arvo b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-arvo new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..55e281b0071a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-arvo @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/arvo/roccatarvo<minor>/actual_profile +Date: Januar 2011 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1-5. + When read, this attribute returns the number of the actual + profile which is also the profile that's active on device startup. + When written this attribute activates the selected profile + immediately. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/arvo/roccatarvo<minor>/button +Date: Januar 2011 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The keyboard can store short macros with consist of 1 button with + several modifier keys internally. + When written, this file lets one set the sequence for a specific + button for a specific profile. Button and profile numbers are + included in written data. The data has to be 24 bytes long. + This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/arvo/roccatarvo<minor>/info +Date: Januar 2011 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When read, this file returns some info about the device like the + installed firmware version. + The size of the data is 8 bytes in size. + This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/arvo/roccatarvo<minor>/key_mask +Date: Januar 2011 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The keyboard lets the user deactivate 5 certain keys like the + windows and application keys, to protect the user from the outcome + of accidentally pressing them. + The integer value of this attribute has bits 0-4 set depending + on the state of the corresponding key. + When read, this file returns the current state of the buttons. + When written, the given buttons are activated/deactivated + immediately. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/arvo/roccatarvo<minor>/mode_key +Date: Januar 2011 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The keyboard has a condensed layout without num-lock key. + Instead it uses a mode-key which activates a gaming mode where + the assignment of the number block changes. + The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0 (OFF) to 1 (ON). + When read, this file returns the actual state of the key. + When written, the key is activated/deactivated immediately. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone index 698b8081c473..b4c4f158ab9c 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone @@ -16,12 +16,14 @@ Description: It is possible to switch the dpi setting of the mouse with the 6 3200 This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/actual_profile Date: March 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: When read, this file returns the number of the actual profile. This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/firmware_version Date: March 2010 @@ -32,6 +34,7 @@ Description: When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the number the decimal point has to be shifted 2 positions to the left. E.g. a returned value of 138 means 1.38 This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/profile[1-5] Date: March 2010 @@ -47,6 +50,7 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the The mouse will reject invalid data, whereas the profile number stored in the profile doesn't need to fit the number of the store. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/settings Date: March 2010 @@ -57,6 +61,7 @@ Description: When read, this file returns the settings stored in the mouse. When written, this file lets write settings back to the mouse. The data has to be 36 bytes long. The mouse will reject invalid data. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/startup_profile Date: March 2010 @@ -66,6 +71,7 @@ Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1 to 5. that's active when the mouse is powered on. When written, this file sets the number of the startup profile and the mouse activates this profile immediately. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/tcu Date: March 2010 @@ -77,6 +83,7 @@ Description: The mouse has a "Tracking Control Unit" which lets the user Writing 0 in this file will switch the TCU off. Writing 1 in this file will start the calibration which takes around 6 seconds to complete and activates the TCU. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/weight Date: March 2010 @@ -96,3 +103,4 @@ Description: The mouse can be equipped with one of four supplied weights 4 20g This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus index 0f9f30eb1742..00efced73969 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus @@ -4,6 +4,7 @@ Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: When read, this file returns the number of the actual profile in range 0-4. This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/firmware_version Date: October 2010 @@ -14,6 +15,7 @@ Description: When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the number the decimal point has to be shifted 2 positions to the left. E.g. a returned value of 121 means 1.21 This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/macro Date: October 2010 @@ -24,6 +26,7 @@ Description: The mouse can store a macro with max 500 key/button strokes button for a specific profile. Button and profile numbers are included in written data. The data has to be 2082 bytes long. This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile_buttons Date: August 2010 @@ -37,6 +40,7 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the Which profile to write is determined by the profile number contained in the data. This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_buttons Date: August 2010 @@ -47,6 +51,7 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the When read, these files return the respective profile buttons. The returned data is 77 bytes in size. This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile_settings Date: October 2010 @@ -61,6 +66,7 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the Which profile to write is determined by the profile number contained in the data. This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_settings Date: August 2010 @@ -72,6 +78,7 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the When read, these files return the respective profile settings. The returned data is 43 bytes in size. This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/sensor Date: October 2010 @@ -80,6 +87,7 @@ Description: The mouse has a tracking- and a distance-control-unit. These can be activated/deactivated and the lift-off distance can be set. The data has to be 6 bytes long. This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/startup_profile Date: October 2010 @@ -89,6 +97,7 @@ Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0-4. that's active when the mouse is powered on. When written, this file sets the number of the startup profile and the mouse activates this profile immediately. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/tcu Date: October 2010 @@ -97,6 +106,7 @@ Description: When written a calibration process for the tracking control unit can be initiated/cancelled. The data has to be 3 bytes long. This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/tcu_image Date: October 2010 @@ -106,3 +116,4 @@ Description: When read the mouse returns a 30x30 pixel image of the calibration process initiated with tcu. The returned data is 1028 bytes in size. This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kovaplus b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kovaplus new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..fdfa16f8189b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kovaplus @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/actual_cpi +Date: January 2011 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1-4. + When read, this attribute returns the number of the active + cpi level. + This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/actual_profile +Date: January 2011 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0-4. + When read, this attribute returns the number of the active + profile. + When written, the mouse activates this profile immediately. + The profile that's active when powered down is the same that's + active when the mouse is powered on. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/actual_sensitivity_x +Date: January 2011 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1-10. + When read, this attribute returns the number of the actual + sensitivity in x direction. + This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/actual_sensitivity_y +Date: January 2011 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1-10. + When read, this attribute returns the number of the actual + sensitivity in y direction. + This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/firmware_version +Date: January 2011 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the + firmware reported by the mouse. Using the integer value eases + further usage in other programs. To receive the real version + number the decimal point has to be shifted 2 positions to the + left. E.g. a returned value of 121 means 1.21 + This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/profile_buttons +Date: January 2011 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the + press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. + profile_buttons holds informations about button layout. + When written, this file lets one write the respective profile + buttons back to the mouse. The data has to be 23 bytes long. + The mouse will reject invalid data. + Which profile to write is determined by the profile number + contained in the data. + This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_buttons +Date: January 2011 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the + press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. + profile_buttons holds informations about button layout. + When read, these files return the respective profile buttons. + The returned data is 23 bytes in size. + This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/profile_settings +Date: January 2011 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the + press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. + profile_settings holds informations like resolution, sensitivity + and light effects. + When written, this file lets one write the respective profile + settings back to the mouse. The data has to be 16 bytes long. + The mouse will reject invalid data. + Which profile to write is determined by the profile number + contained in the data. + This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_settings +Date: January 2011 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the + press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. + profile_settings holds informations like resolution, sensitivity + and light effects. + When read, these files return the respective profile settings. + The returned data is 16 bytes in size. + This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra index 1c37b823f142..5fab71af3c46 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra @@ -13,6 +13,7 @@ Description: It is possible to switch the cpi setting of the mouse with the 4 1600 This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/actual_profile Date: August 2010 @@ -20,6 +21,7 @@ Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: When read, this file returns the number of the actual profile in range 0-4. This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/firmware_version Date: August 2010 @@ -30,6 +32,7 @@ Description: When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the number the decimal point has to be shifted 2 positions to the left. E.g. a returned value of 138 means 1.38 This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile_settings Date: August 2010 @@ -44,6 +47,7 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the Which profile to write is determined by the profile number contained in the data. This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile[1-5]_settings Date: August 2010 @@ -55,6 +59,7 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the When read, these files return the respective profile settings. The returned data is 13 bytes in size. This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile_buttons Date: August 2010 @@ -68,6 +73,7 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the Which profile to write is determined by the profile number contained in the data. This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile[1-5]_buttons Date: August 2010 @@ -78,6 +84,7 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the When read, these files return the respective profile buttons. The returned data is 19 bytes in size. This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/startup_profile Date: August 2010 @@ -86,6 +93,7 @@ Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0-4. When read, this attribute returns the number of the profile that's active when the mouse is powered on. This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/settings Date: August 2010 @@ -96,3 +104,4 @@ Description: When read, this file returns the settings stored in the mouse. When written, this file lets write settings back to the mouse. The data has to be 3 bytes long. The mouse will reject invalid data. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-dmi b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-dmi new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ba9da9503c23 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-dmi @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ +What: /sys/firmware/dmi/ +Date: February 2011 +Contact: Mike Waychison <mikew@google.com> +Description: + Many machines' firmware (x86 and ia64) export DMI / + SMBIOS tables to the operating system. Getting at this + information is often valuable to userland, especially in + cases where there are OEM extensions used. + + The kernel itself does not rely on the majority of the + information in these tables being correct. It equally + cannot ensure that the data as exported to userland is + without error either. + + DMI is structured as a large table of entries, where + each entry has a common header indicating the type and + length of the entry, as well as 'handle' that is + supposed to be unique amongst all entries. + + Some entries are required by the specification, but many + others are optional. In general though, users should + never expect to find a specific entry type on their + system unless they know for certain what their firmware + is doing. Machine to machine will vary. + + Multiple entries of the same type are allowed. In order + to handle these duplicate entry types, each entry is + assigned by the operating system an 'instance', which is + derived from an entry type's ordinal position. That is + to say, if there are 'N' multiple entries with the same type + 'T' in the DMI tables (adjacent or spread apart, it + doesn't matter), they will be represented in sysfs as + entries "T-0" through "T-(N-1)": + + Example entry directories: + + /sys/firmware/dmi/entries/17-0 + /sys/firmware/dmi/entries/17-1 + /sys/firmware/dmi/entries/17-2 + /sys/firmware/dmi/entries/17-3 + ... + + Instance numbers are used in lieu of the firmware + assigned entry handles as the kernel itself makes no + guarantees that handles as exported are unique, and + there are likely firmware images that get this wrong in + the wild. + + Each DMI entry in sysfs has the common header values + exported as attributes: + + handle : The 16bit 'handle' that is assigned to this + entry by the firmware. This handle may be + referred to by other entries. + length : The length of the entry, as presented in the + entry itself. Note that this is _not the + total count of bytes associated with the + entry_. This value represents the length of + the "formatted" portion of the entry. This + "formatted" region is sometimes followed by + the "unformatted" region composed of nul + terminated strings, with termination signalled + by a two nul characters in series. + raw : The raw bytes of the entry. This includes the + "formatted" portion of the entry, the + "unformatted" strings portion of the entry, + and the two terminating nul characters. + type : The type of the entry. This value is the same + as found in the directory name. It indicates + how the rest of the entry should be + interpreted. + instance: The instance ordinal of the entry for the + given type. This value is the same as found + in the parent directory name. + position: The position of the entry within the entirety + of the entirety. + + === Entry Specialization === + + Some entry types may have other information available in + sysfs. + + --- Type 15 - System Event Log --- + + This entry allows the firmware to export a log of + events the system has taken. This information is + typically backed by nvram, but the implementation + details are abstracted by this table. This entries data + is exported in the directory: + + /sys/firmware/dmi/entries/15-0/system_event_log + + and has the following attributes (documented in the + SMBIOS / DMI specification under "System Event Log (Type 15)": + + area_length + header_start_offset + data_start_offset + access_method + status + change_token + access_method_address + header_format + per_log_type_descriptor_length + type_descriptors_supported_count + + As well, the kernel exports the binary attribute: + + raw_event_log : The raw binary bits of the event log + as described by the DMI entry. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-kim b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-kim new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c1653271872a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-kim @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +What: /sys/devices/platform/kim/dev_name +Date: January 2010 +KernelVersion: 2.6.38 +Contact: "Pavan Savoy" <pavan_savoy@ti.com> +Description: + Name of the UART device at which the WL128x chip + is connected. example: "/dev/ttyS0". + The device name flows down to architecture specific board + initialization file from the SFI/ATAGS bootloader + firmware. The name exposed is read from the user-space + dameon and opens the device when install is requested. + +What: /sys/devices/platform/kim/baud_rate +Date: January 2010 +KernelVersion: 2.6.38 +Contact: "Pavan Savoy" <pavan_savoy@ti.com> +Description: + The maximum reliable baud-rate the host can support. + Different platforms tend to have different high-speed + UART configurations, so the baud-rate needs to be set + locally and also sent across to the WL128x via a HCI-VS + command. The entry is read and made use by the user-space + daemon when the ldisc install is requested. + +What: /sys/devices/platform/kim/flow_cntrl +Date: January 2010 +KernelVersion: 2.6.38 +Contact: "Pavan Savoy" <pavan_savoy@ti.com> +Description: + The WL128x makes use of flow control mechanism, and this + entry most often should be 1, the host's UART is required + to have the capability of flow-control, or else this + entry can be made use of for exceptions. + +What: /sys/devices/platform/kim/install +Date: January 2010 +KernelVersion: 2.6.38 +Contact: "Pavan Savoy" <pavan_savoy@ti.com> +Description: + When one of the protocols Bluetooth, FM or GPS wants to make + use of the shared UART transport, it registers to the shared + transport driver, which will signal the user-space for opening, + configuring baud and install line discipline via this sysfs + entry. This entry would be polled upon by the user-space + daemon managing the UART, and is notified about the change + by the sysfs_notify. The value would be '1' when UART needs + to be opened/ldisc installed, and would be '0' when UART + is no more required and needs to be closed. diff --git a/Documentation/Changes b/Documentation/Changes index 4fb88f15f2ef..5f4828a034e3 100644 --- a/Documentation/Changes +++ b/Documentation/Changes @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ o util-linux 2.10o # fdformat --version o module-init-tools 0.9.10 # depmod -V o e2fsprogs 1.41.4 # e2fsck -V o jfsutils 1.1.3 # fsck.jfs -V -o reiserfsprogs 3.6.3 # reiserfsck -V 2>&1|grep reiserfsprogs +o reiserfsprogs 3.6.3 # reiserfsck -V o xfsprogs 2.6.0 # xfs_db -V o squashfs-tools 4.0 # mksquashfs -version o btrfs-progs 0.18 # btrfsck @@ -46,9 +46,9 @@ o isdn4k-utils 3.1pre1 # isdnctrl 2>&1|grep version o nfs-utils 1.0.5 # showmount --version o procps 3.2.0 # ps --version o oprofile 0.9 # oprofiled --version -o udev 081 # udevinfo -V -o grub 0.93 # grub --version -o mcelog 0.6 +o udev 081 # udevd --version +o grub 0.93 # grub --version || grub-install --version +o mcelog 0.6 # mcelog --version o iptables 1.4.2 # iptables -V diff --git a/Documentation/CodingStyle b/Documentation/CodingStyle index 8bb37237ebd2..58b0bf917834 100644 --- a/Documentation/CodingStyle +++ b/Documentation/CodingStyle @@ -168,6 +168,13 @@ Do not unnecessarily use braces where a single statement will do. if (condition) action(); +and + +if (condition) + do_this(); +else + do_that(); + This does not apply if one branch of a conditional statement is a single statement. Use braces in both branches. @@ -659,7 +666,7 @@ There are a number of driver model diagnostic macros in <linux/device.h> which you should use to make sure messages are matched to the right device and driver, and are tagged with the right level: dev_err(), dev_warn(), dev_info(), and so forth. For messages that aren't associated with a -particular device, <linux/kernel.h> defines pr_debug() and pr_info(). +particular device, <linux/printk.h> defines pr_debug() and pr_info(). Coming up with good debugging messages can be quite a challenge; and once you have them, they can be a huge help for remote troubleshooting. Such @@ -819,6 +826,3 @@ language C, URL: http://www.open-std.org/JTC1/SC22/WG14/ Kernel CodingStyle, by greg@kroah.com at OLS 2002: http://www.kroah.com/linux/talks/ols_2002_kernel_codingstyle_talk/html/ --- -Last updated on 2007-July-13. - diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 2861055afd7a..c27915893974 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -73,8 +73,8 @@ services. </para> <para> - The core of every DRM driver is struct drm_device. Drivers - will typically statically initialize a drm_device structure, + The core of every DRM driver is struct drm_driver. Drivers + will typically statically initialize a drm_driver structure, then pass it to drm_init() at load time. </para> @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ <title>Driver initialization</title> <para> Before calling the DRM initialization routines, the driver must - first create and fill out a struct drm_device structure. + first create and fill out a struct drm_driver structure. </para> <programlisting> static struct drm_driver driver = { diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/filesystems.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/filesystems.tmpl index 5e87ad58c0b5..f51f28531b8d 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/filesystems.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/filesystems.tmpl @@ -82,6 +82,11 @@ </sect1> </chapter> + <chapter id="fs_events"> + <title>Events based on file descriptors</title> +!Efs/eventfd.c + </chapter> + <chapter id="sysfs"> <title>The Filesystem for Exporting Kernel Objects</title> !Efs/sysfs/file.c diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt index cfaac34c4557..6ef692667e2f 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt @@ -849,6 +849,37 @@ All: lockdep-checked RCU-protected pointer access See the comment headers in the source code (or the docbook generated from them) for more information. +However, given that there are no fewer than four families of RCU APIs +in the Linux kernel, how do you choose which one to use? The following +list can be helpful: + +a. Will readers need to block? If so, you need SRCU. + +b. What about the -rt patchset? If readers would need to block + in an non-rt kernel, you need SRCU. If readers would block + in a -rt kernel, but not in a non-rt kernel, SRCU is not + necessary. + +c. Do you need to treat NMI handlers, hardirq handlers, + and code segments with preemption disabled (whether + via preempt_disable(), local_irq_save(), local_bh_disable(), + or some other mechanism) as if they were explicit RCU readers? + If so, you need RCU-sched. + +d. Do you need RCU grace periods to complete even in the face + of softirq monopolization of one or more of the CPUs? For + example, is your code subject to network-based denial-of-service + attacks? If so, you need RCU-bh. + +e. Is your workload too update-intensive for normal use of + RCU, but inappropriate for other synchronization mechanisms? + If so, consider SLAB_DESTROY_BY_RCU. But please be careful! + +f. Otherwise, use RCU. + +Of course, this all assumes that you have determined that RCU is in fact +the right tool for your job. + 8. ANSWERS TO QUICK QUIZZES diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/Makefile b/Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8771d832cf8c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +BIN := vrl4 + +.PHONY: all +all: $(BIN) + +.PHONY: clean +clean: + rm -f *.o $(BIN) diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/vrl4.c b/Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/vrl4.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e8a191358ad2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/vrl4.c @@ -0,0 +1,169 @@ +/* + * vrl4 format generator + * + * Copyright (C) 2010 Simon Horman + * + * This file is subject to the terms and conditions of the GNU General Public + * License. See the file "COPYING" in the main directory of this archive + * for more details. + */ + +/* + * usage: vrl4 < zImage > out + * dd if=out of=/dev/sdx bs=512 seek=1 # Write the image to sector 1 + * + * Reads a zImage from stdin and writes a vrl4 image to stdout. + * In practice this means writing a padded vrl4 header to stdout followed + * by the zImage. + * + * The padding places the zImage at ALIGN bytes into the output. + * The vrl4 uses ALIGN + START_BASE as the start_address. + * This is where the mask ROM will jump to after verifying the header. + * + * The header sets copy_size to min(sizeof(zImage), MAX_BOOT_PROG_LEN) + ALIGN. + * That is, the mask ROM will load the padded header (ALIGN bytes) + * And then MAX_BOOT_PROG_LEN bytes of the image, or the entire image, + * whichever is smaller. + * + * The zImage is not modified in any way. + */ + +#define _BSD_SOURCE +#include <endian.h> +#include <unistd.h> +#include <stdint.h> +#include <stdio.h> +#include <errno.h> + +struct hdr { + uint32_t magic1; + uint32_t reserved1; + uint32_t magic2; + uint32_t reserved2; + uint16_t copy_size; + uint16_t boot_options; + uint32_t reserved3; + uint32_t start_address; + uint32_t reserved4; + uint32_t reserved5; + char reserved6[308]; +}; + +#define DECLARE_HDR(h) \ + struct hdr (h) = { \ + .magic1 = htole32(0xea000000), \ + .reserved1 = htole32(0x56), \ + .magic2 = htole32(0xe59ff008), \ + .reserved3 = htole16(0x1) } + +/* Align to 512 bytes, the MMCIF sector size */ +#define ALIGN_BITS 9 +#define ALIGN (1 << ALIGN_BITS) + +#define START_BASE 0xe55b0000 + +/* + * With an alignment of 512 the header uses the first sector. + * There is a 128 sector (64kbyte) limit on the data loaded by the mask ROM. + * So there are 127 sectors left for the boot programme. But in practice + * Only a small portion of a zImage is needed, 16 sectors should be more + * than enough. + * + * Note that this sets how much of the zImage is copied by the mask ROM. + * The entire zImage is present after the header and is loaded + * by the code in the boot program (which is the first portion of the zImage). + */ +#define MAX_BOOT_PROG_LEN (16 * 512) + +#define ROUND_UP(x) ((x + ALIGN - 1) & ~(ALIGN - 1)) + +ssize_t do_read(int fd, void *buf, size_t count) +{ + size_t offset = 0; + ssize_t l; + + while (offset < count) { + l = read(fd, buf + offset, count - offset); + if (!l) + break; + if (l < 0) { + if (errno == EAGAIN || errno == EWOULDBLOCK) + continue; + perror("read"); + return -1; + } + offset += l; + } + + return offset; +} + +ssize_t do_write(int fd, const void *buf, size_t count) +{ + size_t offset = 0; + ssize_t l; + + while (offset < count) { + l = write(fd, buf + offset, count - offset); + if (l < 0) { + if (errno == EAGAIN || errno == EWOULDBLOCK) + continue; + perror("write"); + return -1; + } + offset += l; + } + + return offset; +} + +ssize_t write_zero(int fd, size_t len) +{ + size_t i = len; + + while (i--) { + const char x = 0; + if (do_write(fd, &x, 1) < 0) + return -1; + } + + return len; +} + +int main(void) +{ + DECLARE_HDR(hdr); + char boot_program[MAX_BOOT_PROG_LEN]; + size_t aligned_hdr_len, alligned_prog_len; + ssize_t prog_len; + + prog_len = do_read(0, boot_program, sizeof(boot_program)); + if (prog_len <= 0) + return -1; + + aligned_hdr_len = ROUND_UP(sizeof(hdr)); + hdr.start_address = htole32(START_BASE + aligned_hdr_len); + alligned_prog_len = ROUND_UP(prog_len); + hdr.copy_size = htole16(aligned_hdr_len + alligned_prog_len); + + if (do_write(1, &hdr, sizeof(hdr)) < 0) + return -1; + if (write_zero(1, aligned_hdr_len - sizeof(hdr)) < 0) + return -1; + + if (do_write(1, boot_program, prog_len) < 0) + return 1; + + /* Write out the rest of the kernel */ + while (1) { + prog_len = do_read(0, boot_program, sizeof(boot_program)); + if (prog_len < 0) + return 1; + if (prog_len == 0) + break; + if (do_write(1, boot_program, prog_len) < 0) + return 1; + } + + return 0; +} diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/zboot-rom-mmcif.txt b/Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/zboot-rom-mmcif.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..efff8ae2713d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/zboot-rom-mmcif.txt @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +ROM-able zImage boot from MMC +----------------------------- + +An ROM-able zImage compiled with ZBOOT_ROM_MMCIF may be written to MMC and +SuperH Mobile ARM will to boot directly from the MMCIF hardware block. + +This is achieved by the mask ROM loading the first portion of the image into +MERAM and then jumping to it. This portion contains loader code which +copies the entire image to SDRAM and jumps to it. From there the zImage +boot code proceeds as normal, uncompressing the image into its final +location and then jumping to it. + +This code has been tested on an AP4EB board using the developer 1A eMMC +boot mode which is configured using the following jumper settings. +The board used for testing required a patched mask ROM in order for +this mode to function. + + 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 + x|x|x|x|x| |x| +S4 -+-+-+-+-+-+-+- + | | | | |x| |x on + +The zImage must be written to the MMC card at sector 1 (512 bytes) in +vrl4 format. A utility vrl4 is supplied to accomplish this. + +e.g. + vrl4 < zImage | dd of=/dev/sdX bs=512 seek=1 + +A dual-voltage MMC 4.0 card was used for testing. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/ADC-LH7-Touchscreen b/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/ADC-LH7-Touchscreen deleted file mode 100644 index dc460f055647..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/ADC-LH7-Touchscreen +++ /dev/null @@ -1,61 +0,0 @@ -README on the ADC/Touchscreen Controller -======================================== - -The LH79524 and LH7A404 include a built-in Analog to Digital -controller (ADC) that is used to process input from a touchscreen. -The driver only implements a four-wire touch panel protocol. - -The touchscreen driver is maintenance free except for the pen-down or -touch threshold. Some resistive displays and board combinations may -require tuning of this threshold. The driver exposes some of its -internal state in the sys filesystem. If the kernel is configured -with it, CONFIG_SYSFS, and sysfs is mounted at /sys, there will be a -directory - - /sys/devices/platform/adc-lh7.0 - -containing these files. - - -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Jan 1 00:00 samples - -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Jan 1 00:00 threshold - -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Jan 1 00:00 threshold_range - -The threshold is the current touch threshold. It defaults to 750 on -most targets. - - # cat threshold - 750 - -The threshold_range contains the range of valid values for the -threshold. Values outside of this range will be silently ignored. - - # cat threshold_range - 0 1023 - -To change the threshold, write a value to the threshold file. - - # echo 500 > threshold - # cat threshold - 500 - -The samples file contains the most recently sampled values from the -ADC. There are 12. Below are typical of the last sampled values when -the pen has been released. The first two and last two samples are for -detecting whether or not the pen is down. The third through sixth are -X coordinate samples. The seventh through tenth are Y coordinate -samples. - - # cat samples - 1023 1023 0 0 0 0 530 529 530 529 1023 1023 - -To determine a reasonable threshold, press on the touch panel with an -appropriate stylus and read the values from samples. - - # cat samples - 1023 676 92 103 101 102 855 919 922 922 1023 679 - -The first and eleventh samples are discarded. Thus, the important -values are the second and twelfth which are used to determine if the -pen is down. When both are below the threshold, the driver registers -that the pen is down. When either is above the threshold, it -registers then pen is up. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/CompactFlash b/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/CompactFlash deleted file mode 100644 index 8616d877df9e..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/CompactFlash +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ -README on the Compact Flash for Card Engines -============================================ - -There are three challenges in supporting the CF interface of the Card -Engines. First, every IO operation must be followed with IO to -another memory region. Second, the slot is wired for one-to-one -address mapping *and* it is wired for 16 bit access only. Second, the -interrupt request line from the CF device isn't wired. - -The IOBARRIER issue is covered in README.IOBARRIER. This isn't an -onerous problem. Enough said here. - -The addressing issue is solved in the -arch/arm/mach-lh7a40x/ide-lpd7a40x.c file with some awkward -work-arounds. We implement a special SELECT_DRIVE routine that is -called before the IDE driver performs its own SELECT_DRIVE. Our code -recognizes that the SELECT register cannot be modified without also -writing a command. It send an IDLE_IMMEDIATE command on selecting a -drive. The function also prevents drive select to the slave drive -since there can be only one. The awkward part is that the IDE driver, -even though we have a select procedure, also attempts to change the -drive by writing directly the SELECT register. This attempt is -explicitly blocked by the OUTB function--not pretty, but effective. - -The lack of interrupts is a more serious problem. Even though the CF -card is fast when compared to a normal IDE device, we don't know that -the CF is really flash. A user could use one of the very small hard -drives being shipped with a CF interface. The IDE code includes a -check for interfaces that lack an IRQ. In these cases, submitting a -command to the IDE controller is followed by a call to poll for -completion. If the device isn't immediately ready, it schedules a -timer to poll again later. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/IOBarrier b/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/IOBarrier deleted file mode 100644 index 2e953e228f4d..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/IOBarrier +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ -README on the IOBARRIER for CardEngine IO -========================================= - -Due to an unfortunate oversight when the Card Engines were designed, -the signals that control access to some peripherals, most notably the -SMC91C9111 ethernet controller, are not properly handled. - -The symptom is that some back to back IO with the peripheral returns -unreliable data. With the SMC chip, you'll see errors about the bank -register being 'screwed'. - -The cause is that the AEN signal to the SMC chip does not transition -for every memory access. It is driven through the CPLD from the CS7 -line of the CPU's static memory controller which is optimized to -eliminate unnecessary transitions. Yet, the SMC requires a transition -for every write access. The Sharp website has more information about -the effect this power-conserving feature has on peripheral -interfacing. - -The solution is to follow every write access to the SMC chip with an -access to another memory region that will force the CPU to release the -chip select line. It is important to guarantee that this access -forces the CPU off-chip. We map a page of SDRAM as if it were an -uncacheable IO device and read from it after every SMC IO write -operation. - - SMC IO - BARRIER IO - -Only this sequence is important. It does not matter that there is no -BARRIER IO before the access to the SMC chip because the AEN latch -only needs occurs after the SMC IO write cycle. The routines that -implement this work-around make an additional concession which is to -disable interrupts during the IO sequence. Other hardware devices -(the LogicPD CPLD) have registers in the same physical memory -region as the SMC chip. An interrupt might allow an access to one of -those registers while SMC IO is being performed. - -You might be tempted to think that we have to access another device -attached to the static memory controller, but the empirical evidence -indicates that this is not so. Mapping 0x00000000 (flash) and -0xc0000000 (SDRAM) appear to have the same effect. Using SDRAM seems -to be faster. Choosing to access an undecoded memory region is not -desirable as there is no way to know how that chip select will be used -in the future. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/KEV7A400 b/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/KEV7A400 deleted file mode 100644 index be32b14cd535..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/KEV7A400 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8 +0,0 @@ -README on Implementing Linux for Sharp's KEV7a400 -================================================= - -This product has been discontinued by Sharp. For the time being, the -partially implemented code remains in the kernel. At some point in -the future, either the code will be finished or it will be removed -completely. This depends primarily on how many of the development -boards are in the field. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LCDPanels b/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LCDPanels deleted file mode 100644 index fb1b21c2f2f4..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LCDPanels +++ /dev/null @@ -1,59 +0,0 @@ -README on the LCD Panels -======================== - -Configuration options for several LCD panels, available from Logic PD, -are included in the kernel source. This README will help you -understand the configuration data and give you some guidance for -adding support for other panels if you wish. - - -lcd-panels.h ------------- - -There is no way, at present, to detect which panel is attached to the -system at runtime. Thus the kernel configuration is static. The file -arch/arm/mach-ld7a40x/lcd-panels.h (or similar) defines all of the -panel specific parameters. - -It should be possible for this data to be shared among several device -families. The current layout may be insufficiently general, but it is -amenable to improvement. - - -PIXEL_CLOCK ------------ - -The panel data sheets will give a range of acceptable pixel clocks. -The fundamental LCDCLK input frequency is divided down by a PCD -constant in field '.tim2'. It may happen that it is impossible to set -the pixel clock within this range. A clock which is too slow will -tend to flicker. For the highest quality image, set the clock as high -as possible. - - -MARGINS -------- - -These values may be difficult to glean from the panel data sheet. In -the case of the Sharp panels, the upper margin is explicitly called -out as a specific number of lines from the top of the frame. The -other values may not matter as much as the panels tend to -automatically center the image. - - -Sync Sense ----------- - -The sense of the hsync and vsync pulses may be called out in the data -sheet. On one panel, the sense of these pulses determine the height -of the visible region on the panel. Most of the Sharp panels use -negative sense sync pulses set by the TIM2_IHS and TIM2_IVS bits in -'.tim2'. - - -Pel Layout ----------- - -The Sharp color TFT panels are all configured for 16 bit direct color -modes. The amba-lcd driver sets the pel mode to 565 for 5 bits of -each red and blue and 6 bits of green. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LPD7A400 b/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LPD7A400 deleted file mode 100644 index 3275b453bfdf..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LPD7A400 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,15 +0,0 @@ -README on Implementing Linux for the Logic PD LPD7A400-10 -========================================================= - -- CPLD memory mapping - - The board designers chose to use high address lines for controlling - access to the CPLD registers. It turns out to be a big waste - because we're using an MMU and must map IO space into virtual - memory. The result is that we have to make a mapping for every - register. - -- Serial Console - - It may be OK not to use the serial console option if the user passes - the console device name to the kernel. This deserves some exploration. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LPD7A40X b/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LPD7A40X deleted file mode 100644 index 8c29a27e208f..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LPD7A40X +++ /dev/null @@ -1,16 +0,0 @@ -README on Implementing Linux for the Logic PD LPD7A40X-10 -========================================================= - -- CPLD memory mapping - - The board designers chose to use high address lines for controlling - access to the CPLD registers. It turns out to be a big waste - because we're using an MMU and must map IO space into virtual - memory. The result is that we have to make a mapping for every - register. - -- Serial Console - - It may be OK not to use the serial console option if the user passes - the console device name to the kernel. This deserves some exploration. - diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/SDRAM b/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/SDRAM deleted file mode 100644 index 93ddc23c2faa..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/SDRAM +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ -README on the SDRAM Controller for the LH7a40X -============================================== - -The standard configuration for the SDRAM controller generates a sparse -memory array. The precise layout is determined by the SDRAM chips. A -default kernel configuration assembles the discontiguous memory -regions into separate memory nodes via the NUMA (Non-Uniform Memory -Architecture) facilities. In this default configuration, the kernel -is forgiving about the precise layout. As long as it is given an -accurate picture of available memory by the bootloader the kernel will -execute correctly. - -The SDRC supports a mode where some of the chip select lines are -swapped in order to make SDRAM look like a synchronous ROM. Setting -this bit means that the RAM will present as a contiguous array. Some -programmers prefer this to the discontiguous layout. Be aware that -may be a penalty for this feature where some some configurations of -memory are significantly reduced; i.e. 64MiB of RAM appears as only 32 -MiB. - -There are a couple of configuration options to override the default -behavior. When the SROMLL bit is set and memory appears as a -contiguous array, there is no reason to support NUMA. -CONFIG_LH7A40X_CONTIGMEM disables NUMA support. When physical memory -is discontiguous, the memory tables are organized such that there are -two banks per nodes with a small gap between them. This layout wastes -some kernel memory for page tables representing non-existent memory. -CONFIG_LH7A40X_ONE_BANK_PER_NODE optimizes the node tables such that -there are no gaps. These options control the low level organization -of the memory management tables in ways that may prevent the kernel -from booting or may cause the kernel to allocated excessively large -page tables. Be warned. Only change these options if you know what -you are doing. The default behavior is a reasonable compromise that -will suit all users. - --- - -A typical 32MiB system with the default configuration options will -find physical memory managed as follows. - - node 0: 0xc0000000 4MiB - 0xc1000000 4MiB - node 1: 0xc4000000 4MiB - 0xc5000000 4MiB - node 2: 0xc8000000 4MiB - 0xc9000000 4MiB - node 3: 0xcc000000 4MiB - 0xcd000000 4MiB - -Setting CONFIG_LH7A40X_ONE_BANK_PER_NODE will put each bank into a -separate node. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/VectoredInterruptController b/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/VectoredInterruptController deleted file mode 100644 index 23047e9861ee..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/VectoredInterruptController +++ /dev/null @@ -1,80 +0,0 @@ -README on the Vectored Interrupt Controller of the LH7A404 -========================================================== - -The 404 revision of the LH7A40X series comes with two vectored -interrupts controllers. While the kernel does use some of the -features of these devices, it is far from the purpose for which they -were designed. - -When this README was written, the implementation of the VICs was in -flux. It is possible that some details, especially with priorities, -will change. - -The VIC support code is inspired by routines written by Sharp. - - -Priority Control ----------------- - -The significant reason for using the VIC's vectoring is to control -interrupt priorities. There are two tables in -arch/arm/mach-lh7a40x/irq-lh7a404.c that look something like this. - - static unsigned char irq_pri_vic1[] = { IRQ_GPIO3INTR, }; - static unsigned char irq_pri_vic2[] = { - IRQ_T3UI, IRQ_GPIO7INTR, - IRQ_UART1INTR, IRQ_UART2INTR, IRQ_UART3INTR, }; - -The initialization code reads these tables and inserts a vector -address and enable for each indicated IRQ. Vectored interrupts have -higher priority than non-vectored interrupts. So, on VIC1, -IRQ_GPIO3INTR will be served before any other non-FIQ interrupt. Due -to the way that the vectoring works, IRQ_T3UI is the next highest -priority followed by the other vectored interrupts on VIC2. After -that, the non-vectored interrupts are scanned in VIC1 then in VIC2. - - -ISR ---- - -The interrupt service routine macro get_irqnr() in -arch/arm/kernel/entry-armv.S scans the VICs for the next active -interrupt. The vectoring makes this code somewhat larger than it was -before using vectoring (refer to the LH7A400 implementation). In the -case where an interrupt is vectored, the implementation will tend to -be faster than the non-vectored version. However, the worst-case path -is longer. - -It is worth noting that at present, there is no need to read -VIC2_VECTADDR because the register appears to be shared between the -controllers. The code is written such that if this changes, it ought -to still work properly. - - -Vector Addresses ----------------- - -The proper use of the vectoring hardware would jump to the ISR -specified by the vectoring address. Linux isn't structured to take -advantage of this feature, though it might be possible to change -things to support it. - -In this implementation, the vectoring address is used to speed the -search for the active IRQ. The address is coded such that the lowest -6 bits store the IRQ number for vectored interrupts. These numbers -correspond to the bits in the interrupt status registers. IRQ zero is -the lowest interrupt bit in VIC1. IRQ 32 is the lowest interrupt bit -in VIC2. Because zero is a valid IRQ number and because we cannot -detect whether or not there is a valid vectoring address if that -address is zero, the eigth bit (0x100) is set for vectored interrupts. -The address for IRQ 0x18 (VIC2) is 0x118. Only the ninth bit is set -for the default handler on VIC1 and only the tenth bit is set for the -default handler on VIC2. - -In other words. - - 0x000 - no active interrupt - 0x1ii - vectored interrupt 0xii - 0x2xx - unvectored interrupt on VIC1 (xx is don't care) - 0x4xx - unvectored interrupt on VIC2 (xx is don't care) - diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt index 44b8b7af8019..cbdfb7d9455b 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt @@ -349,6 +349,10 @@ To mount a cgroup hierarchy with all available subsystems, type: The "xxx" is not interpreted by the cgroup code, but will appear in /proc/mounts so may be any useful identifying string that you like. +Note: Some subsystems do not work without some user input first. For instance, +if cpusets are enabled the user will have to populate the cpus and mems files +for each new cgroup created before that group can be used. + To mount a cgroup hierarchy with just the cpuset and memory subsystems, type: # mount -t cgroup -o cpuset,memory hier1 /dev/cgroup @@ -426,6 +430,14 @@ You can attach the current shell task by echoing 0: # echo 0 > tasks +Note: Since every task is always a member of exactly one cgroup in each +mounted hierarchy, to remove a task from its current cgroup you must +move it into a new cgroup (possibly the root cgroup) by writing to the +new cgroup's tasks file. + +Note: If the ns cgroup is active, moving a process to another cgroup can +fail. + 2.3 Mounting hierarchies by name -------------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt index 5d0d5692a365..98a30829af7a 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt @@ -693,7 +693,7 @@ There are ways to query or modify cpusets: - via the C library libcgroup. (http://sourceforge.net/projects/libcg/) - via the python application cset. - (http://developer.novell.com/wiki/index.php/Cpuset) + (http://code.google.com/p/cpuset/) The sched_setaffinity calls can also be done at the shell prompt using SGI's runon or Robert Love's taskset. The mbind and set_mempolicy @@ -725,13 +725,14 @@ Now you want to do something with this cpuset. In this directory you can find several files: # ls -cpuset.cpu_exclusive cpuset.memory_spread_slab -cpuset.cpus cpuset.mems -cpuset.mem_exclusive cpuset.sched_load_balance -cpuset.mem_hardwall cpuset.sched_relax_domain_level -cpuset.memory_migrate notify_on_release -cpuset.memory_pressure tasks -cpuset.memory_spread_page +cgroup.clone_children cpuset.memory_pressure +cgroup.event_control cpuset.memory_spread_page +cgroup.procs cpuset.memory_spread_slab +cpuset.cpu_exclusive cpuset.mems +cpuset.cpus cpuset.sched_load_balance +cpuset.mem_exclusive cpuset.sched_relax_domain_level +cpuset.mem_hardwall notify_on_release +cpuset.memory_migrate tasks Reading them will give you information about the state of this cpuset: the CPUs and Memory Nodes it can use, the processes that are using diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt index 7781857dc940..b6ed61c95856 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt @@ -485,8 +485,9 @@ The feature can be disabled by # echo 0 > memory.use_hierarchy -NOTE1: Enabling/disabling will fail if the cgroup already has other - cgroups created below it. +NOTE1: Enabling/disabling will fail if either the cgroup already has other + cgroups created below it, or if the parent cgroup has use_hierarchy + enabled. NOTE2: When panic_on_oom is set to "2", the whole system will panic in case of an OOM event in any cgroup. diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt index 737988fca64d..e74d0a2eb1cf 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt @@ -158,6 +158,17 @@ intensive calculation on your laptop that you do not care how long it takes to complete as you can 'nice' it and prevent it from taking part in the deciding process of whether to increase your CPU frequency. +sampling_down_factor: this parameter controls the rate at which the +kernel makes a decision on when to decrease the frequency while running +at top speed. When set to 1 (the default) decisions to reevaluate load +are made at the same interval regardless of current clock speed. But +when set to greater than 1 (e.g. 100) it acts as a multiplier for the +scheduling interval for reevaluating load when the CPU is at its top +speed due to high load. This improves performance by reducing the overhead +of load evaluation and helping the CPU stay at its top speed when truly +busy, rather than shifting back and forth in speed. This tunable has no +effect on behavior at lower speeds/lower CPU loads. + 2.5 Conservative ---------------- diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-crypt.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-crypt.txt index 59293ac4a5d0..6b5c42dbbe84 100644 --- a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-crypt.txt +++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-crypt.txt @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ Example scripts =============== LUKS (Linux Unified Key Setup) is now the preferred way to set up disk encryption with dm-crypt using the 'cryptsetup' utility, see -http://clemens.endorphin.org/cryptography +http://code.google.com/p/cryptsetup/ [[ #!/bin/sh diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/00-INDEX b/Documentation/devicetree/00-INDEX new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b78f691fd847 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/00-INDEX @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +Documentation for device trees, a data structure by which bootloaders pass +hardware layout to Linux in a device-independent manner, simplifying hardware +probing. This subsystem is maintained by Grant Likely +<grant.likely@secretlab.ca> and has a mailing list at +https://lists.ozlabs.org/listinfo/devicetree-discuss + +00-INDEX + - this file +booting-without-of.txt + - Booting Linux without Open Firmware, describes history and format of device trees. diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/sata.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/fsl-sata.txt index b46bcf46c3d8..b46bcf46c3d8 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/sata.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/fsl-sata.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/eeprom.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/eeprom.txt index 4342c10de1bf..4342c10de1bf 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/eeprom.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/eeprom.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fb/sm501fb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fb/sm501fb.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7d319fba9b5b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fb/sm501fb.txt @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +* SM SM501 + +The SM SM501 is a LCD controller, with proper hardware, it can also +drive DVI monitors. + +Required properties: +- compatible : should be "smi,sm501". +- reg : contain two entries: + - First entry: System Configuration register + - Second entry: IO space (Display Controller register) +- interrupts : SMI interrupt to the cpu should be described here. +- interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller that + services interrupts for this device. + +Optional properties: +- mode : select a video mode: + <xres>x<yres>[-<bpp>][@<refresh>] +- edid : verbatim EDID data block describing attached display. + Data from the detailed timing descriptor will be used to + program the display controller. +- little-endian: availiable on big endian systems, to + set different foreign endian. +- big-endian: availiable on little endian systems, to + set different foreign endian. + +Example for MPC5200: + display@1,0 { + compatible = "smi,sm501"; + reg = <1 0x00000000 0x00800000 + 1 0x03e00000 0x00200000>; + interrupts = <1 1 3>; + mode = "640x480-32@60"; + edid = [edid-data]; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/8xxx_gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/8xxx_gpio.txt index b0019eb5330e..b0019eb5330e 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/8xxx_gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/8xxx_gpio.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/gpio/gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt index edaa84d288a1..edaa84d288a1 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/gpio/gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/gpio/led.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/led.txt index 064db928c3c1..064db928c3c1 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/gpio/led.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/led.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ads1015.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ads1015.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..918a507d1159 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ads1015.txt @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ +ADS1015 (I2C) + +This device is a 12-bit A-D converter with 4 inputs. + +The inputs can be used single ended or in certain differential combinations. + +For configuration all possible combinations are mapped to 8 channels: + 0: Voltage over AIN0 and AIN1. + 1: Voltage over AIN0 and AIN3. + 2: Voltage over AIN1 and AIN3. + 3: Voltage over AIN2 and AIN3. + 4: Voltage over AIN0 and GND. + 5: Voltage over AIN1 and GND. + 6: Voltage over AIN2 and GND. + 7: Voltage over AIN3 and GND. + +Each channel can be configured individually: + - pga is the programmable gain amplifier (values are full scale) + 0: +/- 6.144 V + 1: +/- 4.096 V + 2: +/- 2.048 V (default) + 3: +/- 1.024 V + 4: +/- 0.512 V + 5: +/- 0.256 V + - data_rate in samples per second + 0: 128 + 1: 250 + 2: 490 + 3: 920 + 4: 1600 (default) + 5: 2400 + 6: 3300 + +1) The /ads1015 node + + Required properties: + + - compatible : must be "ti,ads1015" + - reg : I2C bus address of the device + - #address-cells : must be <1> + - #size-cells : must be <0> + + The node contains child nodes for each channel that the platform uses. + + Example ADS1015 node: + + ads1015@49 { + compatible = "ti,ads1015"; + reg = <0x49>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + [ child node definitions... ] + } + +2) channel nodes + + Required properties: + + - reg : the channel number + + Optional properties: + + - ti,gain : the programmable gain amplifier setting + - ti,datarate : the converter data rate + + Example ADS1015 channel node: + + channel@4 { + reg = <4>; + ti,gain = <3>; + ti,datarate = <5>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/ce4100-i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/ce4100-i2c.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..569b16248514 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/ce4100-i2c.txt @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +CE4100 I2C +---------- + +CE4100 has one PCI device which is described as the I2C-Controller. This +PCI device has three PCI-bars, each bar contains a complete I2C +controller. So we have a total of three independent I2C-Controllers +which share only an interrupt line. +The driver is probed via the PCI-ID and is gathering the information of +attached devices from the devices tree. +Grant Likely recommended to use the ranges property to map the PCI-Bar +number to its physical address and to use this to find the child nodes +of the specific I2C controller. This were his exact words: + + Here's where the magic happens. Each entry in + ranges describes how the parent pci address space + (middle group of 3) is translated to the local + address space (first group of 2) and the size of + each range (last cell). In this particular case, + the first cell of the local address is chosen to be + 1:1 mapped to the BARs, and the second is the + offset from be base of the BAR (which would be + non-zero if you had 2 or more devices mapped off + the same BAR) + + ranges allows the address mapping to be described + in a way that the OS can interpret without + requiring custom device driver code. + +This is an example which is used on FalconFalls: +------------------------------------------------ + i2c-controller@b,2 { + #address-cells = <2>; + #size-cells = <1>; + compatible = "pci8086,2e68.2", + "pci8086,2e68", + "pciclass,ff0000", + "pciclass,ff00"; + + reg = <0x15a00 0x0 0x0 0x0 0x0>; + interrupts = <16 1>; + + /* as described by Grant, the first number in the group of + * three is the bar number followed by the 64bit bar address + * followed by size of the mapping. The bar address + * requires also a valid translation in parents ranges + * property. + */ + ranges = <0 0 0x02000000 0 0xdffe0500 0x100 + 1 0 0x02000000 0 0xdffe0600 0x100 + 2 0 0x02000000 0 0xdffe0700 0x100>; + + i2c@0 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + compatible = "intel,ce4100-i2c-controller"; + + /* The first number in the reg property is the + * number of the bar + */ + reg = <0 0 0x100>; + + /* This I2C controller has no devices */ + }; + + i2c@1 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + compatible = "intel,ce4100-i2c-controller"; + reg = <1 0 0x100>; + + /* This I2C controller has one gpio controller */ + gpio@26 { + #gpio-cells = <2>; + compatible = "ti,pcf8575"; + reg = <0x26>; + gpio-controller; + }; + }; + + i2c@2 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + compatible = "intel,ce4100-i2c-controller"; + reg = <2 0 0x100>; + + gpio@26 { + #gpio-cells = <2>; + compatible = "ti,pcf8575"; + reg = <0x26>; + gpio-controller; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/fsl-i2c.txt index 1eacd6b20ed5..1eacd6b20ed5 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/i2c.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/fsl-i2c.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/marvell.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/marvell.txt index f1533d91953a..f1533d91953a 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/marvell.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/marvell.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/esdhc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-esdhc.txt index 64bcb8be973c..64bcb8be973c 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/esdhc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-esdhc.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/mmc-spi-slot.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc-spi-slot.txt index c39ac2891951..89a0084df2f7 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/mmc-spi-slot.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc-spi-slot.txt @@ -7,8 +7,13 @@ Required properties: - voltage-ranges : two cells are required, first cell specifies minimum slot voltage (mV), second cell specifies maximum slot voltage (mV). Several ranges could be specified. -- gpios : (optional) may specify GPIOs in this order: Card-Detect GPIO, + +Optional properties: +- gpios : may specify GPIOs in this order: Card-Detect GPIO, Write-Protect GPIO. +- interrupts : the interrupt of a card detect interrupt. +- interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller that + services interrupts for this device. Example: @@ -20,4 +25,6 @@ Example: &qe_pio_d 15 0>; voltage-ranges = <3300 3300>; spi-max-frequency = <50000000>; + interrupts = <42>; + interrupt-parent = <&PIC>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/upm-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsl-upm-nand.txt index a48b2cadc7f0..a48b2cadc7f0 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/upm-nand.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsl-upm-nand.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/mtd-physmap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mtd-physmap.txt index 80152cb567d9..80152cb567d9 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/mtd-physmap.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mtd-physmap.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/can.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/mpc5xxx-mscan.txt index 2fa4fcd38fd6..2fa4fcd38fd6 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/can.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/mpc5xxx-mscan.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/can/sja1000.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/sja1000.txt index d6d209ded937..d6d209ded937 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/can/sja1000.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/sja1000.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/tsec.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-tsec-phy.txt index edb7ae19e868..edb7ae19e868 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/tsec.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-tsec-phy.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/gpio/mdio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-gpio.txt index bc9549529014..bc9549529014 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/gpio/mdio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-gpio.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/phy.txt index bb8c742eb8c5..bb8c742eb8c5 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/phy.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/phy.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/open-pic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/open-pic.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..909a902dff85 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/open-pic.txt @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +* Open PIC Binding + +This binding specifies what properties must be available in the device tree +representation of an Open PIC compliant interrupt controller. This binding is +based on the binding defined for Open PIC in [1] and is a superset of that +binding. + +Required properties: + + NOTE: Many of these descriptions were paraphrased here from [1] to aid + readability. + + - compatible: Specifies the compatibility list for the PIC. The type + shall be <string> and the value shall include "open-pic". + + - reg: Specifies the base physical address(s) and size(s) of this + PIC's addressable register space. The type shall be <prop-encoded-array>. + + - interrupt-controller: The presence of this property identifies the node + as an Open PIC. No property value shall be defined. + + - #interrupt-cells: Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an + interrupt source. The type shall be a <u32> and the value shall be 2. + + - #address-cells: Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an + address. The type shall be <u32> and the value shall be 0. As such, + 'interrupt-map' nodes do not have to specify a parent unit address. + +Optional properties: + + - pic-no-reset: The presence of this property indicates that the PIC + shall not be reset during runtime initialization. No property value shall + be defined. The presence of this property also mandates that any + initialization related to interrupt sources shall be limited to sources + explicitly referenced in the device tree. + +* Interrupt Specifier Definition + + Interrupt specifiers consists of 2 cells encoded as + follows: + + - <1st-cell>: The interrupt-number that identifies the interrupt source. + + - <2nd-cell>: The level-sense information, encoded as follows: + 0 = low-to-high edge triggered + 1 = active low level-sensitive + 2 = active high level-sensitive + 3 = high-to-low edge triggered + +* Examples + +Example 1: + + /* + * An Open PIC interrupt controller + */ + mpic: pic@40000 { + // This is an interrupt controller node. + interrupt-controller; + + // No address cells so that 'interrupt-map' nodes which reference + // this Open PIC node do not need a parent address specifier. + #address-cells = <0>; + + // Two cells to encode interrupt sources. + #interrupt-cells = <2>; + + // Offset address of 0x40000 and size of 0x40000. + reg = <0x40000 0x40000>; + + // Compatible with Open PIC. + compatible = "open-pic"; + + // The PIC shall not be reset. + pic-no-reset; + }; + +Example 2: + + /* + * An interrupt generating device that is wired to an Open PIC. + */ + serial0: serial@4500 { + // Interrupt source '42' that is active high level-sensitive. + // Note that there are only two cells as specified in the interrupt + // parent's '#interrupt-cells' property. + interrupts = <42 2>; + + // The interrupt controller that this device is wired to. + interrupt-parent = <&mpic>; + }; + +* References + +[1] Power.org (TM) Standard for Embedded Power Architecture (TM) Platform + Requirements (ePAPR), Version 1.0, July 2008. + (http://www.power.org/resources/downloads/Power_ePAPR_APPROVED_v1.0.pdf) + diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/83xx-512x-pci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/83xx-512x-pci.txt index 35a465362408..35a465362408 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/83xx-512x-pci.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/83xx-512x-pci.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/4xx/cpm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/cpm.txt index ee459806d35e..ee459806d35e 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/4xx/cpm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/cpm.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/4xx/emac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/emac.txt index 2161334a7ca5..2161334a7ca5 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/4xx/emac.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/emac.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/4xx/ndfc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/ndfc.txt index 869f0b5f16e8..869f0b5f16e8 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/4xx/ndfc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/ndfc.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/4xx/ppc440spe-adma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/ppc440spe-adma.txt index 515ebcf1b97d..515ebcf1b97d 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/4xx/ppc440spe-adma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/ppc440spe-adma.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/4xx/reboot.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/reboot.txt index d7217260589c..d7217260589c 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/4xx/reboot.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/reboot.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/board.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/board.txt index 39e941515a36..39e941515a36 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/board.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/board.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cache_sram.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cache_sram.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..781955f5217d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cache_sram.txt @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +* Freescale PQ3 and QorIQ based Cache SRAM + +Freescale's mpc85xx and some QorIQ platforms provide an +option of configuring a part of (or full) cache memory +as SRAM. This cache SRAM representation in the device +tree should be done as under:- + +Required properties: + +- compatible : should be "fsl,p2020-cache-sram" +- fsl,cache-sram-ctlr-handle : points to the L2 controller +- reg : offset and length of the cache-sram. + +Example: + +cache-sram@fff00000 { + fsl,cache-sram-ctlr-handle = <&L2>; + reg = <0 0xfff00000 0 0x10000>; + compatible = "fsl,p2020-cache-sram"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm.txt index 160c752484b4..160c752484b4 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/brg.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/brg.txt index 4c7d45eaf025..4c7d45eaf025 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/brg.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/brg.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/i2c.txt index 87bc6048667e..87bc6048667e 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/i2c.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/i2c.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/pic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/pic.txt index 8e3ee1681618..8e3ee1681618 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/pic.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/pic.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/usb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/usb.txt index 74bfda4bb824..74bfda4bb824 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/usb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/usb.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/gpio.txt index 349f79fd7076..349f79fd7076 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/gpio.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/network.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/network.txt index 0e4269446580..0e4269446580 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/network.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/network.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe.txt index 4f8930263dd9..4f8930263dd9 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/firmware.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/firmware.txt index 249db3a15d15..249db3a15d15 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/firmware.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/firmware.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/par_io.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/par_io.txt index 60984260207b..60984260207b 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/par_io.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/par_io.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/pincfg.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/pincfg.txt index c5b43061db3a..c5b43061db3a 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/pincfg.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/pincfg.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/ucc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/ucc.txt index e47734bee3f0..e47734bee3f0 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/ucc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/ucc.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/usb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/usb.txt index 9ccd5f30405b..9ccd5f30405b 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/usb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/usb.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/serial.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/serial.txt index 2ea76d9d137c..2ea76d9d137c 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/serial.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/serial.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/diu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/diu.txt index b66cb6d31d69..b66cb6d31d69 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/diu.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/diu.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/dma.txt index 2a4b4bce6110..2a4b4bce6110 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/dma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/dma.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/ecm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/ecm.txt index f514f29c67d6..f514f29c67d6 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/ecm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/ecm.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/gtm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/gtm.txt index 9a33efded4bc..9a33efded4bc 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/gtm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/gtm.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/guts.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/guts.txt index 9e7a2417dac5..9e7a2417dac5 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/guts.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/guts.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/lbc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/lbc.txt index 3300fec501c5..3300fec501c5 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/lbc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/lbc.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mcm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mcm.txt index 4ceda9b3b413..4ceda9b3b413 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mcm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mcm.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mcu-mpc8349emitx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mcu-mpc8349emitx.txt index 0f766333b6eb..0f766333b6eb 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mcu-mpc8349emitx.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mcu-mpc8349emitx.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mpc5121-psc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpc5121-psc.txt index 8832e8798912..8832e8798912 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mpc5121-psc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpc5121-psc.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mpc5200.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpc5200.txt index 4ccb2cd5df94..4ccb2cd5df94 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mpc5200.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpc5200.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpic.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8aa10f45ebe6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpic.txt @@ -0,0 +1,211 @@ +===================================================================== +Freescale MPIC Interrupt Controller Node +Copyright (C) 2010,2011 Freescale Semiconductor Inc. +===================================================================== + +The Freescale MPIC interrupt controller is found on all PowerQUICC +and QorIQ processors and is compatible with the Open PIC. The +notable difference from Open PIC binding is the addition of 2 +additional cells in the interrupt specifier defining interrupt type +information. + +PROPERTIES + + - compatible + Usage: required + Value type: <string> + Definition: Shall include "fsl,mpic". Freescale MPIC + controllers compatible with this binding have Block + Revision Registers BRR1 and BRR2 at offset 0x0 and + 0x10 in the MPIC. + + - reg + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: A standard property. Specifies the physical + offset and length of the device's registers within the + CCSR address space. + + - interrupt-controller + Usage: required + Value type: <empty> + Definition: Specifies that this node is an interrupt + controller + + - #interrupt-cells + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: Shall be 2 or 4. A value of 2 means that interrupt + specifiers do not contain the interrupt-type or type-specific + information cells. + + - #address-cells + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: Shall be 0. + + - pic-no-reset + Usage: optional + Value type: <empty> + Definition: The presence of this property specifies that the + MPIC must not be reset by the client program, and that + the boot program has initialized all interrupt source + configuration registers to a sane state-- masked or + directed at other cores. This ensures that the client + program will not receive interrupts for sources not belonging + to the client. The presence of this property also mandates + that any initialization related to interrupt sources shall + be limited to sources explicitly referenced in the device tree. + +INTERRUPT SPECIFIER DEFINITION + + Interrupt specifiers consists of 4 cells encoded as + follows: + + <1st-cell> interrupt-number + + Identifies the interrupt source. The meaning + depends on the type of interrupt. + + Note: If the interrupt-type cell is undefined + (i.e. #interrupt-cells = 2), this cell + should be interpreted the same as for + interrupt-type 0-- i.e. an external or + normal SoC device interrupt. + + <2nd-cell> level-sense information, encoded as follows: + 0 = low-to-high edge triggered + 1 = active low level-sensitive + 2 = active high level-sensitive + 3 = high-to-low edge triggered + + <3rd-cell> interrupt-type + + The following types are supported: + + 0 = external or normal SoC device interrupt + + The interrupt-number cell contains + the SoC device interrupt number. The + type-specific cell is undefined. The + interrupt-number is derived from the + MPIC a block of registers referred to as + the "Interrupt Source Configuration Registers". + Each source has 32-bytes of registers + (vector/priority and destination) in this + region. So interrupt 0 is at offset 0x0, + interrupt 1 is at offset 0x20, and so on. + + 1 = error interrupt + + The interrupt-number cell contains + the SoC device interrupt number for + the error interrupt. The type-specific + cell identifies the specific error + interrupt number. + + 2 = MPIC inter-processor interrupt (IPI) + + The interrupt-number cell identifies + the MPIC IPI number. The type-specific + cell is undefined. + + 3 = MPIC timer interrupt + + The interrupt-number cell identifies + the MPIC timer number. The type-specific + cell is undefined. + + <4th-cell> type-specific information + + The type-specific cell is encoded as follows: + + - For interrupt-type 1 (error interrupt), + the type-specific cell contains the + bit number of the error interrupt in the + Error Interrupt Summary Register. + +EXAMPLE 1 + /* + * mpic interrupt controller with 4 cells per specifier + */ + mpic: pic@40000 { + compatible = "fsl,mpic"; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <4>; + #address-cells = <0>; + reg = <0x40000 0x40000>; + }; + +EXAMPLE 2 + /* + * The MPC8544 I2C controller node has an internal + * interrupt number of 27. As per the reference manual + * this corresponds to interrupt source configuration + * registers at 0x5_0560. + * + * The interrupt source configuration registers begin + * at 0x5_0000. + * + * To compute the interrupt specifier interrupt number + * + * 0x560 >> 5 = 43 + * + * The interrupt source configuration registers begin + * at 0x5_0000, and so the i2c vector/priority registers + * are at 0x5_0560. + */ + i2c@3000 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + cell-index = <0>; + compatible = "fsl-i2c"; + reg = <0x3000 0x100>; + interrupts = <43 2>; + interrupt-parent = <&mpic>; + dfsrr; + }; + + +EXAMPLE 3 + /* + * Definition of a node defining the 4 + * MPIC IPI interrupts. Note the interrupt + * type of 2. + */ + ipi@410a0 { + compatible = "fsl,mpic-ipi"; + reg = <0x40040 0x10>; + interrupts = <0 0 2 0 + 1 0 2 0 + 2 0 2 0 + 3 0 2 0>; + }; + +EXAMPLE 4 + /* + * Definition of a node defining the MPIC + * global timers. Note the interrupt + * type of 3. + */ + timer0: timer@41100 { + compatible = "fsl,mpic-global-timer"; + reg = <0x41100 0x100>; + interrupts = <0 0 3 0 + 1 0 3 0 + 2 0 3 0 + 3 0 3 0>; + }; + +EXAMPLE 5 + /* + * Definition of an error interrupt (interupt type 1). + * SoC interrupt number is 16 and the specific error + * interrupt bit in the error interrupt summary register + * is 23. + */ + memory-controller@8000 { + compatible = "fsl,p4080-memory-controller"; + reg = <0x8000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <16 2 1 23>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/msi-pic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/msi-pic.txt index bcc30bac6831..70558c3f3682 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/msi-pic.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/msi-pic.txt @@ -5,14 +5,21 @@ Required properties: first is "fsl,CHIP-msi", where CHIP is the processor(mpc8610, mpc8572, etc.) and the second is "fsl,mpic-msi" or "fsl,ipic-msi" depending on the parent type. + - reg : should contain the address and the length of the shared message interrupt register set. + - msi-available-ranges: use <start count> style section to define which msi interrupt can be used in the 256 msi interrupts. This property is optional, without this, all the 256 MSI interrupts can be used. + Each available range must begin and end on a multiple of 32 (i.e. + no splitting an individual MSI register or the associated PIC interrupt). + - interrupts : each one of the interrupts here is one entry per 32 MSIs, and routed to the host interrupt controller. the interrupts should - be set as edge sensitive. + be set as edge sensitive. If msi-available-ranges is present, only + the interrupts that correspond to available ranges shall be present. + - interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller that services interrupts for this device. for 83xx cpu, the interrupts are routed to IPIC, and for 85xx/86xx cpu the interrupts are routed diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/pmc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/pmc.txt index 07256b7ffcaa..07256b7ffcaa 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/pmc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/pmc.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/sec.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/sec.txt index 2b6f2d45c45a..2b6f2d45c45a 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/sec.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/sec.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/ssi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/ssi.txt index 5ff76c9c57d2..5ff76c9c57d2 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/ssi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/ssi.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/nintendo/gamecube.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/nintendo/gamecube.txt index b558585b1aaf..b558585b1aaf 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/nintendo/gamecube.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/nintendo/gamecube.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/nintendo/wii.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/nintendo/wii.txt index a7e155a023b8..a7e155a023b8 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/nintendo/wii.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/nintendo/wii.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-cmos.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-cmos.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7382989b3052 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-cmos.txt @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ + Motorola mc146818 compatible RTC +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Required properties: + - compatible : "motorola,mc146818" + - reg : should contain registers location and length. + +Optional properties: + - interrupts : should contain interrupt. + - interrupt-parent : interrupt source phandle. + - ctrl-reg : Contains the initial value of the control register also + called "Register B". + - freq-reg : Contains the initial value of the frequency register also + called "Regsiter A". + +"Register A" and "B" are usually initialized by the firmware (BIOS for +instance). If this is not done, it can be performed by the driver. + +ISA Example: + + rtc@70 { + compatible = "motorola,mc146818"; + interrupts = <8 3>; + interrupt-parent = <&ioapic1>; + ctrl-reg = <2>; + freq-reg = <0x26>; + reg = <1 0x70 2>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_jtaguart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_jtaguart.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c152f65f9a28 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_jtaguart.txt @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +Altera JTAG UART + +Required properties: +- compatible : should be "ALTR,juart-1.0" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_uart.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..71cae3f70100 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_uart.txt @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ +Altera UART + +Required properties: +- compatible : should be "ALTR,uart-1.0" + +Optional properties: +- clock-frequency : frequency of the clock input to the UART diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serio/altera_ps2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serio/altera_ps2.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4d9eecc2ef7d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serio/altera_ps2.txt @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +Altera UP PS/2 controller + +Required properties: +- compatible : should be "ALTR,ps2-1.0". diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/spi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-spi.txt index 777abd7399d5..777abd7399d5 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/spi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-spi.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/spi-bus.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt index e782add2e457..e782add2e457 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/spi-bus.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_altera.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_altera.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..dda375943506 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_altera.txt @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +Altera SPI + +Required properties: +- compatible : should be "ALTR,spi-1.0". diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_oc_tiny.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_oc_tiny.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d95c0b367a04 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_oc_tiny.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +OpenCores tiny SPI + +Required properties: +- compatible : should be "opencores,tiny-spi-rtlsvn2". +- gpios : should specify GPIOs used for chipselect. +Optional properties: +- clock-frequency : input clock frequency to the core. +- baud-width: width, in bits, of the programmable divider used to scale + the input clock to SCLK. + +The clock-frequency and baud-width properties are needed only if the divider +is programmable. They are not needed if the divider is fixed. diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/usb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/fsl-usb.txt index bd5723f0b67e..bd5723f0b67e 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/usb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/fsl-usb.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/usb-ehci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-ehci.txt index fa18612f757b..fa18612f757b 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/usb-ehci.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-ehci.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/ce4100.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/ce4100.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b49ae593a60b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/ce4100.txt @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +CE4100 Device Tree Bindings +--------------------------- + +The CE4100 SoC uses for in core peripherals the following compatible +format: <vendor>,<chip>-<device>. +Many of the "generic" devices like HPET or IO APIC have the ce4100 +name in their compatible property because they first appeared in this +SoC. + +The CPU node +------------ + cpu@0 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "intel,ce4100"; + reg = <0>; + lapic = <&lapic0>; + }; + +The reg property describes the CPU number. The lapic property points to +the local APIC timer. + +The SoC node +------------ + +This node describes the in-core peripherals. Required property: + compatible = "intel,ce4100-cp"; + +The PCI node +------------ +This node describes the PCI bus on the SoC. Its property should be + compatible = "intel,ce4100-pci", "pci"; + +If the OS is using the IO-APIC for interrupt routing then the reported +interrupt numbers for devices is no longer true. In order to obtain the +correct interrupt number, the child node which represents the device has +to contain the interrupt property. Besides the interrupt property it has +to contain at least the reg property containing the PCI bus address and +compatible property according to "PCI Bus Binding Revision 2.1". diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/interrupt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/interrupt.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7d19f494f19a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/interrupt.txt @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +Interrupt chips +--------------- + +* Intel I/O Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (IO APIC) + + Required properties: + -------------------- + compatible = "intel,ce4100-ioapic"; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; + + Device's interrupt property: + + interrupts = <P S>; + + The first number (P) represents the interrupt pin which is wired to the + IO APIC. The second number (S) represents the sense of interrupt which + should be configured and can be one of: + 0 - Edge Rising + 1 - Level Low + 2 - Level High + 3 - Edge Falling + +* Local APIC + Required property: + + compatible = "intel,ce4100-lapic"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/timer.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c688af58e3bd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/timer.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6 @@ +Timers +------ + +* High Precision Event Timer (HPET) + Required property: + compatible = "intel,ce4100-hpet"; diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/xilinx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/xilinx.txt index 299d0923537b..299d0923537b 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/xilinx.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/xilinx.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt index 7400d7555dc3..55fd2623445b 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ Table of Contents I - Introduction 1) Entry point for arch/powerpc - 2) Board support + 2) Entry point for arch/x86 II - The DT block format 1) Header @@ -41,13 +41,6 @@ Table of Contents VI - System-on-a-chip devices and nodes 1) Defining child nodes of an SOC 2) Representing devices without a current OF specification - a) PHY nodes - b) Interrupt controllers - c) 4xx/Axon EMAC ethernet nodes - d) Xilinx IP cores - e) USB EHCI controllers - f) MDIO on GPIOs - g) SPI busses VII - Specifying interrupt information for devices 1) interrupts property @@ -123,7 +116,7 @@ Revision Information I - Introduction ================ -During the recent development of the Linux/ppc64 kernel, and more +During the development of the Linux/ppc64 kernel, and more specifically, the addition of new platform types outside of the old IBM pSeries/iSeries pair, it was decided to enforce some strict rules regarding the kernel entry and bootloader <-> kernel interfaces, in @@ -146,7 +139,7 @@ section III, but, for example, the kernel does not require you to create a node for every PCI device in the system. It is a requirement to have a node for PCI host bridges in order to provide interrupt routing informations and memory/IO ranges, among others. It is also -recommended to define nodes for on chip devices and other busses that +recommended to define nodes for on chip devices and other buses that don't specifically fit in an existing OF specification. This creates a great flexibility in the way the kernel can then probe those and match drivers to device, without having to hard code all sorts of tables. It @@ -158,7 +151,7 @@ it with special cases. 1) Entry point for arch/powerpc ------------------------------- - There is one and one single entry point to the kernel, at the start + There is one single entry point to the kernel, at the start of the kernel image. That entry point supports two calling conventions: @@ -210,12 +203,6 @@ it with special cases. with all CPUs. The way to do that with method b) will be described in a later revision of this document. - -2) Board support ----------------- - -64-bit kernels: - Board supports (platforms) are not exclusive config options. An arbitrary set of board supports can be built in a single kernel image. The kernel will "know" what set of functions to use for a @@ -234,48 +221,30 @@ it with special cases. containing the various callbacks that the generic code will use to get to your platform specific code - c) Add a reference to your "ppc_md" structure in the - "machines" table in arch/powerpc/kernel/setup_64.c if you are - a 64-bit platform. - - d) request and get assigned a platform number (see PLATFORM_* - constants in arch/powerpc/include/asm/processor.h - -32-bit embedded kernels: - - Currently, board support is essentially an exclusive config option. - The kernel is configured for a single platform. Part of the reason - for this is to keep kernels on embedded systems small and efficient; - part of this is due to the fact the code is already that way. In the - future, a kernel may support multiple platforms, but only if the + A kernel image may support multiple platforms, but only if the platforms feature the same core architecture. A single kernel build cannot support both configurations with Book E and configurations with classic Powerpc architectures. - 32-bit embedded platforms that are moved into arch/powerpc using a - flattened device tree should adopt the merged tree practice of - setting ppc_md up dynamically, even though the kernel is currently - built with support for only a single platform at a time. This allows - unification of the setup code, and will make it easier to go to a - multiple-platform-support model in the future. - -NOTE: I believe the above will be true once Ben's done with the merge -of the boot sequences.... someone speak up if this is wrong! - - To add a 32-bit embedded platform support, follow the instructions - for 64-bit platforms above, with the exception that the Kconfig - option should be set up such that the kernel builds exclusively for - the platform selected. The processor type for the platform should - enable another config option to select the specific board - supported. - -NOTE: If Ben doesn't merge the setup files, may need to change this to -point to setup_32.c +2) Entry point for arch/x86 +------------------------------- + There is one single 32bit entry point to the kernel at code32_start, + the decompressor (the real mode entry point goes to the same 32bit + entry point once it switched into protected mode). That entry point + supports one calling convention which is documented in + Documentation/x86/boot.txt + The physical pointer to the device-tree block (defined in chapter II) + is passed via setup_data which requires at least boot protocol 2.09. + The type filed is defined as - I will describe later the boot process and various callbacks that - your platform should implement. + #define SETUP_DTB 2 + This device-tree is used as an extension to the "boot page". As such it + does not parse / consider data which is already covered by the boot + page. This includes memory size, reserved ranges, command line arguments + or initrd address. It simply holds information which can not be retrieved + otherwise like interrupt routing or a list of devices behind an I2C bus. II - The DT block format ======================== @@ -300,8 +269,8 @@ the block to RAM before passing it to the kernel. 1) Header --------- - The kernel is entered with r3 pointing to an area of memory that is - roughly described in arch/powerpc/include/asm/prom.h by the structure + The kernel is passed the physical address pointing to an area of memory + that is roughly described in include/linux/of_fdt.h by the structure boot_param_header: struct boot_param_header { @@ -339,7 +308,7 @@ struct boot_param_header { All values in this header are in big endian format, the various fields in this header are defined more precisely below. All "offset" values are in bytes from the start of the header; that is - from the value of r3. + from the physical base address of the device tree block. - magic @@ -437,7 +406,7 @@ struct boot_param_header { ------------------------------ - r3 -> | struct boot_param_header | + base -> | struct boot_param_header | ------------------------------ | (alignment gap) (*) | ------------------------------ @@ -457,7 +426,7 @@ struct boot_param_header { -----> ------------------------------ | | - --- (r3 + totalsize) + --- (base + totalsize) (*) The alignment gaps are not necessarily present; their presence and size are dependent on the various alignment requirements of @@ -500,7 +469,7 @@ the device-tree structure. It is typically used to represent "path" in the device-tree. More details about the actual format of these will be below. -The kernel powerpc generic code does not make any formal use of the +The kernel generic code does not make any formal use of the unit address (though some board support code may do) so the only real requirement here for the unit address is to ensure uniqueness of the node unit name at a given level of the tree. Nodes with no notion @@ -518,20 +487,21 @@ path to the root node is "/". Every node which actually represents an actual device (that is, a node which isn't only a virtual "container" for more nodes, like "/cpus" -is) is also required to have a "device_type" property indicating the -type of node . +is) is also required to have a "compatible" property indicating the +specific hardware and an optional list of devices it is fully +backwards compatible with. Finally, every node that can be referenced from a property in another -node is required to have a "linux,phandle" property. Real open -firmware implementations provide a unique "phandle" value for every -node that the "prom_init()" trampoline code turns into -"linux,phandle" properties. However, this is made optional if the -flattened device tree is used directly. An example of a node +node is required to have either a "phandle" or a "linux,phandle" +property. Real Open Firmware implementations provide a unique +"phandle" value for every node that the "prom_init()" trampoline code +turns into "linux,phandle" properties. However, this is made optional +if the flattened device tree is used directly. An example of a node referencing another node via "phandle" is when laying out the interrupt tree which will be described in a further version of this document. -This "linux, phandle" property is a 32-bit value that uniquely +The "phandle" property is a 32-bit value that uniquely identifies a node. You are free to use whatever values or system of values, internal pointers, or whatever to generate these, the only requirement is that every node for which you provide that property has @@ -694,7 +664,7 @@ made of 3 cells, the bottom two containing the actual address itself while the top cell contains address space indication, flags, and pci bus & device numbers. -For busses that support dynamic allocation, it's the accepted practice +For buses that support dynamic allocation, it's the accepted practice to then not provide the address in "reg" (keep it 0) though while providing a flag indicating the address is dynamically allocated, and then, to provide a separate "assigned-addresses" property that @@ -711,7 +681,7 @@ prom_parse.c file of the recent kernels for your bus type. The "reg" property only defines addresses and sizes (if #size-cells is non-0) within a given bus. In order to translate addresses upward (that is into parent bus addresses, and possibly into CPU physical -addresses), all busses must contain a "ranges" property. If the +addresses), all buses must contain a "ranges" property. If the "ranges" property is missing at a given level, it's assumed that translation isn't possible, i.e., the registers are not visible on the parent bus. The format of the "ranges" property for a bus is a list @@ -727,9 +697,9 @@ example, for a PCI host controller, that would be a CPU address. For a PCI<->ISA bridge, that would be a PCI address. It defines the base address in the parent bus where the beginning of that range is mapped. -For a new 64-bit powerpc board, I recommend either the 2/2 format or +For new 64-bit board support, I recommend either the 2/2 format or Apple's 2/1 format which is slightly more compact since sizes usually -fit in a single 32-bit word. New 32-bit powerpc boards should use a +fit in a single 32-bit word. New 32-bit board support should use a 1/1 format, unless the processor supports physical addresses greater than 32-bits, in which case a 2/1 format is recommended. @@ -754,7 +724,7 @@ of their actual names. While earlier users of Open Firmware like OldWorld macintoshes tended to use the actual device name for the "name" property, it's nowadays considered a good practice to use a name that is closer to the device -class (often equal to device_type). For example, nowadays, ethernet +class (often equal to device_type). For example, nowadays, Ethernet controllers are named "ethernet", an additional "model" property defining precisely the chip type/model, and "compatible" property defining the family in case a single driver can driver more than one @@ -772,7 +742,7 @@ is present). 4) Note about node and property names and character set ------------------------------------------------------- -While open firmware provides more flexible usage of 8859-1, this +While Open Firmware provides more flexible usage of 8859-1, this specification enforces more strict rules. Nodes and properties should be comprised only of ASCII characters 'a' to 'z', '0' to '9', ',', '.', '_', '+', '#', '?', and '-'. Node names additionally @@ -792,7 +762,7 @@ address which can extend beyond that limit. -------------------------------- These are all that are currently required. However, it is strongly recommended that you expose PCI host bridges as documented in the - PCI binding to open firmware, and your interrupt tree as documented + PCI binding to Open Firmware, and your interrupt tree as documented in OF interrupt tree specification. a) The root node @@ -802,20 +772,12 @@ address which can extend beyond that limit. - model : this is your board name/model - #address-cells : address representation for "root" devices - #size-cells: the size representation for "root" devices - - device_type : This property shouldn't be necessary. However, if - you decide to create a device_type for your root node, make sure it - is _not_ "chrp" unless your platform is a pSeries or PAPR compliant - one for 64-bit, or a CHRP-type machine for 32-bit as this will - matched by the kernel this way. - - Additionally, some recommended properties are: - - compatible : the board "family" generally finds its way here, for example, if you have 2 board models with a similar layout, that typically get driven by the same platform code in the - kernel, you would use a different "model" property but put a - value in "compatible". The kernel doesn't directly use that - value but it is generally useful. + kernel, you would specify the exact board model in the + compatible property followed by an entry that represents the SoC + model. The root node is also generally where you add additional properties specific to your board like the serial number if any, that sort of @@ -841,8 +803,11 @@ address which can extend beyond that limit. So under /cpus, you are supposed to create a node for every CPU on the machine. There is no specific restriction on the name of the - CPU, though It's common practice to call it PowerPC,<name>. For + CPU, though it's common to call it <architecture>,<core>. For example, Apple uses PowerPC,G5 while IBM uses PowerPC,970FX. + However, the Generic Names convention suggests that it would be + better to simply use 'cpu' for each cpu node and use the compatible + property to identify the specific cpu core. Required properties: @@ -923,7 +888,7 @@ compatibility. e) The /chosen node - This node is a bit "special". Normally, that's where open firmware + This node is a bit "special". Normally, that's where Open Firmware puts some variable environment information, like the arguments, or the default input/output devices. @@ -940,11 +905,7 @@ compatibility. console device if any. Typically, if you have serial devices on your board, you may want to put the full path to the one set as the default console in the firmware here, for the kernel to pick - it up as its own default console. If you look at the function - set_preferred_console() in arch/ppc64/kernel/setup.c, you'll see - that the kernel tries to find out the default console and has - knowledge of various types like 8250 serial ports. You may want - to extend this function to add your own. + it up as its own default console. Note that u-boot creates and fills in the chosen node for platforms that use it. @@ -955,23 +916,23 @@ compatibility. f) the /soc<SOCname> node - This node is used to represent a system-on-a-chip (SOC) and must be - present if the processor is a SOC. The top-level soc node contains - information that is global to all devices on the SOC. The node name - should contain a unit address for the SOC, which is the base address - of the memory-mapped register set for the SOC. The name of an soc + This node is used to represent a system-on-a-chip (SoC) and must be + present if the processor is a SoC. The top-level soc node contains + information that is global to all devices on the SoC. The node name + should contain a unit address for the SoC, which is the base address + of the memory-mapped register set for the SoC. The name of an SoC node should start with "soc", and the remainder of the name should represent the part number for the soc. For example, the MPC8540's soc node would be called "soc8540". Required properties: - - device_type : Should be "soc" - ranges : Should be defined as specified in 1) to describe the - translation of SOC addresses for memory mapped SOC registers. - - bus-frequency: Contains the bus frequency for the SOC node. + translation of SoC addresses for memory mapped SoC registers. + - bus-frequency: Contains the bus frequency for the SoC node. Typically, the value of this field is filled in by the boot loader. + - compatible : Exact model of the SoC Recommended properties: @@ -1155,12 +1116,13 @@ while all this has been defined and implemented. - An example of code for iterating nodes & retrieving properties directly from the flattened tree format can be found in the kernel - file arch/ppc64/kernel/prom.c, look at scan_flat_dt() function, + file drivers/of/fdt.c. Look at the of_scan_flat_dt() function, its usage in early_init_devtree(), and the corresponding various early_init_dt_scan_*() callbacks. That code can be re-used in a GPL bootloader, and as the author of that code, I would be happy to discuss possible free licensing to any vendor who wishes to integrate all or part of this code into a non-GPL bootloader. + (reference needed; who is 'I' here? ---gcl Jan 31, 2011) @@ -1203,18 +1165,19 @@ MPC8540. 2) Representing devices without a current OF specification ---------------------------------------------------------- -Currently, there are many devices on SOCs that do not have a standard -representation pre-defined as part of the open firmware -specifications, mainly because the boards that contain these SOCs are -not currently booted using open firmware. This section contains -descriptions for the SOC devices for which new nodes have been -defined; this list will expand as more and more SOC-containing -platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model. +Currently, there are many devices on SoCs that do not have a standard +representation defined as part of the Open Firmware specifications, +mainly because the boards that contain these SoCs are not currently +booted using Open Firmware. Binding documentation for new devices +should be added to the Documentation/devicetree/bindings directory. +That directory will expand as device tree support is added to more and +more SoCs. + VII - Specifying interrupt information for devices =================================================== -The device tree represents the busses and devices of a hardware +The device tree represents the buses and devices of a hardware system in a form similar to the physical bus topology of the hardware. diff --git a/Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt b/Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt index 58ea64a96165..e6c4b757025b 100644 --- a/Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt +++ b/Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt @@ -205,12 +205,20 @@ of the characters: The flags are: +f + Include the function name in the printed message +l + Include line number in the printed message +m + Include module name in the printed message p Causes a printk() message to be emitted to dmesg +t + Include thread ID in messages not generated from interrupt context -Note the regexp ^[-+=][scp]+$ matches a flags specification. +Note the regexp ^[-+=][flmpt]+$ matches a flags specification. Note also that there is no convenient syntax to remove all -the flags at once, you need to use "-psc". +the flags at once, you need to use "-flmpt". Debug messages during boot process diff --git a/Documentation/fb/sm501.txt b/Documentation/fb/sm501.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8d17aebd2648 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/fb/sm501.txt @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +Configuration: + +You can pass the following kernel command line options to sm501 videoframebuffer: + + sm501fb.bpp= SM501 Display driver: + Specifiy bits-per-pixel if not specified by 'mode' + + sm501fb.mode= SM501 Display driver: + Specify resolution as + "<xres>x<yres>[-<bpp>][@<refresh>]" diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index b3f35e5f9c95..895330940f5d 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt @@ -35,6 +35,17 @@ Who: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> --------------------------- +What: AR9170USB +When: 2.6.40 + +Why: This driver is deprecated and the firmware is no longer + maintained. The replacement driver "carl9170" has been + around for a while, so the devices are still supported. + +Who: Christian Lamparter <chunkeey@googlemail.com> + +--------------------------- + What: IRQF_SAMPLE_RANDOM Check: IRQF_SAMPLE_RANDOM When: July 2009 @@ -574,16 +585,6 @@ Who: NeilBrown <neilb@suse.de> ---------------------------- -What: i2c_adapter.id -When: June 2011 -Why: This field is deprecated. I2C device drivers shouldn't change their - behavior based on the underlying I2C adapter. Instead, the I2C - adapter driver should instantiate the I2C devices and provide the - needed platform-specific information. -Who: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> - ----------------------------- - What: cancel_rearming_delayed_work[queue]() When: 2.6.39 @@ -604,6 +605,13 @@ Who: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> ---------------------------- +What: xt_connlimit rev 0 +When: 2012 +Who: Jan Engelhardt <jengelh@medozas.de> +Files: net/netfilter/xt_connlimit.c + +---------------------------- + What: noswapaccount kernel command line parameter When: 2.6.40 Why: The original implementation of memsw feature enabled by @@ -619,3 +627,20 @@ Why: The original implementation of memsw feature enabled by Who: Michal Hocko <mhocko@suse.cz> ---------------------------- + +What: ipt_addrtype match include file +When: 2012 +Why: superseded by xt_addrtype +Who: Florian Westphal <fw@strlen.de> +Files: include/linux/netfilter_ipv4/ipt_addrtype.h + +---------------------------- + +What: i2c_driver.attach_adapter + i2c_driver.detach_adapter +When: September 2011 +Why: These legacy callbacks should no longer be used as i2c-core offers + a variety of preferable alternative ways to instantiate I2C devices. +Who: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> + +---------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking index 4471a416c274..2e994efe12cb 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking @@ -166,13 +166,11 @@ prototypes: void (*kill_sb) (struct super_block *); locking rules: may block -get_sb yes mount yes kill_sb yes -->get_sb() returns error or 0 with locked superblock attached to the vfsmount -(exclusive on ->s_umount). -->mount() returns ERR_PTR or the root dentry. +->mount() returns ERR_PTR or the root dentry; its superblock should be locked +on return. ->kill_sb() takes a write-locked superblock, does all shutdown work on it, unlocks and drops the reference. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/adfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/adfs.txt index 9e8811f92b84..5949766353f7 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/adfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/adfs.txt @@ -9,6 +9,9 @@ Mount options for ADFS will be nnn. Default 0700. othmask=nnn The permission mask for ADFS 'other' permissions will be nnn. Default 0077. + ftsuffix=n When ftsuffix=0, no file type suffix will be applied. + When ftsuffix=1, a hexadecimal suffix corresponding to + the RISC OS file type will be added. Default 0. Mapping of ADFS permissions to Linux permissions ------------------------------------------------ @@ -55,3 +58,18 @@ Mapping of ADFS permissions to Linux permissions You can therefore tailor the permission translation to whatever you desire the permissions should be under Linux. + +RISC OS file type suffix +------------------------ + + RISC OS file types are stored in bits 19..8 of the file load address. + + To enable non-RISC OS systems to be used to store files without losing + file type information, a file naming convention was devised (initially + for use with NFS) such that a hexadecimal suffix of the form ,xyz + denoted the file type: e.g. BasicFile,ffb is a BASIC (0xffb) file. This + naming convention is now also used by RISC OS emulators such as RPCEmu. + + Mounting an ADFS disc with option ftsuffix=1 will cause appropriate file + type suffixes to be appended to file names read from a directory. If the + ftsuffix option is zero or omitted, no file type suffixes will be added. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/exofs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/exofs.txt index abd2a9b5b787..23583a136975 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/exofs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/exofs.txt @@ -104,7 +104,15 @@ Where: exofs specific options: Options are separated by commas (,) pid=<integer> - The partition number to mount/create as container of the filesystem. - This option is mandatory. + This option is mandatory. integer can be + Hex by pre-pending an 0x to the number. + osdname=<id> - Mount by a device's osdname. + osdname is usually a 36 character uuid of the + form "d2683732-c906-4ee1-9dbd-c10c27bb40df". + It is one of the device's uuid specified in the + mkfs.exofs format command. + If this option is specified then the /dev/osdX + above can be empty and is ignored. to=<integer> - Timeout in ticks for a single command. default is (60 * HZ) [for debugging only] diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/pnfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/pnfs.txt index bc0b9cfe095b..983e14abe7e9 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/pnfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/pnfs.txt @@ -46,3 +46,10 @@ data server cache file driver devices refer to data servers, which are kept in a module level cache. Its reference is held over the lifetime of the deviceid pointing to it. + +lseg +---- +lseg maintains an extra reference corresponding to the NFS_LSEG_VALID +bit which holds it in the pnfs_layout_hdr's list. When the final lseg +is removed from the pnfs_layout_hdr's list, the NFS_LAYOUT_DESTROYED +bit is set, preventing any new lsegs from being added. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/porting b/Documentation/filesystems/porting index dfbcd1b00b0a..0c986c9e8519 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/porting +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/porting @@ -394,3 +394,10 @@ file) you must return -EOPNOTSUPP if FALLOC_FL_PUNCH_HOLE is set in mode. Currently you can only have FALLOC_FL_PUNCH_HOLE with FALLOC_FL_KEEP_SIZE set, so the i_size should not change when hole punching, even when puching the end of a file off. + +-- +[mandatory] + ->get_sb() is gone. Switch to use of ->mount(). Typically it's just +a matter of switching from calling get_sb_... to mount_... and changing the +function type. If you were doing it manually, just switch from setting ->mnt_root +to some pointer to returning that pointer. On errors return ERR_PTR(...). diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/romfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/romfs.txt index 2d2a7b2a16b9..e2b07cc9120a 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/romfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/romfs.txt @@ -17,8 +17,7 @@ comparison, an actual rescue disk used up 3202 blocks with ext2, while with romfs, it needed 3079 blocks. To create such a file system, you'll need a user program named -genromfs. It is available via anonymous ftp on sunsite.unc.edu and -its mirrors, in the /pub/Linux/system/recovery/ directory. +genromfs. It is available on http://romfs.sourceforge.net/ As the name suggests, romfs could be also used (space-efficiently) on various read-only media, like (E)EPROM disks if someone will have the diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt index 5d1335faec2d..f806e50aaa63 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt @@ -39,10 +39,12 @@ userspace. Top-level directories in sysfs represent the common ancestors of object hierarchies; i.e. the subsystems the objects belong to. -Sysfs internally stores the kobject that owns the directory in the -->d_fsdata pointer of the directory's dentry. This allows sysfs to do -reference counting directly on the kobject when the file is opened and -closed. +Sysfs internally stores a pointer to the kobject that implements a +directory in the sysfs_dirent object associated with the directory. In +the past this kobject pointer has been used by sysfs to do reference +counting directly on the kobject whenever the file is opened or closed. +With the current sysfs implementation the kobject reference count is +only modified directly by the function sysfs_schedule_callback(). Attributes @@ -208,9 +210,9 @@ Other notes: is 4096. - show() methods should return the number of bytes printed into the - buffer. This is the return value of snprintf(). + buffer. This is the return value of scnprintf(). -- show() should always use snprintf(). +- show() should always use scnprintf(). - store() should return the number of bytes used from the buffer. If the entire buffer has been used, just return the count argument. @@ -229,7 +231,7 @@ A very simple (and naive) implementation of a device attribute is: static ssize_t show_name(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr, char *buf) { - return snprintf(buf, PAGE_SIZE, "%s\n", dev->name); + return scnprintf(buf, PAGE_SIZE, "%s\n", dev->name); } static ssize_t store_name(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr, diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt index 12fedb7834c6..d7b13b01e980 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt @@ -82,12 +82,12 @@ Mount options bulk_read read more in one go to take advantage of flash media that read faster sequentially no_bulk_read (*) do not bulk-read -no_chk_data_crc skip checking of CRCs on data nodes in order to +no_chk_data_crc (*) skip checking of CRCs on data nodes in order to improve read performance. Use this option only if the flash media is highly reliable. The effect of this option is that corruption of the contents of a file can go unnoticed. -chk_data_crc (*) do not skip checking CRCs on data nodes +chk_data_crc do not skip checking CRCs on data nodes compr=none override default compressor and set it to "none" compr=lzo override default compressor and set it to "lzo" compr=zlib override default compressor and set it to "zlib" diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt index 94cf97b901d7..306f0ae8df09 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt @@ -95,10 +95,11 @@ functions: extern int unregister_filesystem(struct file_system_type *); The passed struct file_system_type describes your filesystem. When a -request is made to mount a device onto a directory in your filespace, -the VFS will call the appropriate get_sb() method for the specific -filesystem. The dentry for the mount point will then be updated to -point to the root inode for the new filesystem. +request is made to mount a filesystem onto a directory in your namespace, +the VFS will call the appropriate mount() method for the specific +filesystem. New vfsmount refering to the tree returned by ->mount() +will be attached to the mountpoint, so that when pathname resolution +reaches the mountpoint it will jump into the root of that vfsmount. You can see all filesystems that are registered to the kernel in the file /proc/filesystems. @@ -107,14 +108,14 @@ file /proc/filesystems. struct file_system_type ----------------------- -This describes the filesystem. As of kernel 2.6.22, the following +This describes the filesystem. As of kernel 2.6.39, the following members are defined: struct file_system_type { const char *name; int fs_flags; - int (*get_sb) (struct file_system_type *, int, - const char *, void *, struct vfsmount *); + struct dentry (*mount) (struct file_system_type *, int, + const char *, void *); void (*kill_sb) (struct super_block *); struct module *owner; struct file_system_type * next; @@ -128,11 +129,11 @@ struct file_system_type { fs_flags: various flags (i.e. FS_REQUIRES_DEV, FS_NO_DCACHE, etc.) - get_sb: the method to call when a new instance of this + mount: the method to call when a new instance of this filesystem should be mounted kill_sb: the method to call when an instance of this filesystem - should be unmounted + should be shut down owner: for internal VFS use: you should initialize this to THIS_MODULE in most cases. @@ -141,7 +142,7 @@ struct file_system_type { s_lock_key, s_umount_key: lockdep-specific -The get_sb() method has the following arguments: +The mount() method has the following arguments: struct file_system_type *fs_type: describes the filesystem, partly initialized by the specific filesystem code @@ -153,32 +154,39 @@ The get_sb() method has the following arguments: void *data: arbitrary mount options, usually comes as an ASCII string (see "Mount Options" section) - struct vfsmount *mnt: a vfs-internal representation of a mount point +The mount() method must return the root dentry of the tree requested by +caller. An active reference to its superblock must be grabbed and the +superblock must be locked. On failure it should return ERR_PTR(error). -The get_sb() method must determine if the block device specified -in the dev_name and fs_type contains a filesystem of the type the method -supports. If it succeeds in opening the named block device, it initializes a -struct super_block descriptor for the filesystem contained by the block device. -On failure it returns an error. +The arguments match those of mount(2) and their interpretation +depends on filesystem type. E.g. for block filesystems, dev_name is +interpreted as block device name, that device is opened and if it +contains a suitable filesystem image the method creates and initializes +struct super_block accordingly, returning its root dentry to caller. + +->mount() may choose to return a subtree of existing filesystem - it +doesn't have to create a new one. The main result from the caller's +point of view is a reference to dentry at the root of (sub)tree to +be attached; creation of new superblock is a common side effect. The most interesting member of the superblock structure that the -get_sb() method fills in is the "s_op" field. This is a pointer to +mount() method fills in is the "s_op" field. This is a pointer to a "struct super_operations" which describes the next level of the filesystem implementation. -Usually, a filesystem uses one of the generic get_sb() implementations -and provides a fill_super() method instead. The generic methods are: +Usually, a filesystem uses one of the generic mount() implementations +and provides a fill_super() callback instead. The generic variants are: - get_sb_bdev: mount a filesystem residing on a block device + mount_bdev: mount a filesystem residing on a block device - get_sb_nodev: mount a filesystem that is not backed by a device + mount_nodev: mount a filesystem that is not backed by a device - get_sb_single: mount a filesystem which shares the instance between + mount_single: mount a filesystem which shares the instance between all mounts -A fill_super() method implementation has the following arguments: +A fill_super() callback implementation has the following arguments: - struct super_block *sb: the superblock structure. The method fill_super() + struct super_block *sb: the superblock structure. The callback must initialize this properly. void *data: arbitrary mount options, usually comes as an ASCII @@ -865,7 +873,7 @@ struct dentry_operations { void (*d_iput)(struct dentry *, struct inode *); char *(*d_dname)(struct dentry *, char *, int); struct vfsmount *(*d_automount)(struct path *); - int (*d_manage)(struct dentry *, bool, bool); + int (*d_manage)(struct dentry *, bool); }; d_revalidate: called when the VFS needs to revalidate a dentry. This @@ -961,10 +969,6 @@ struct dentry_operations { mounted on it and not to check the automount flag. Any other error code will abort pathwalk completely. - If the 'mounting_here' parameter is true, then namespace_sem is being - held by the caller and the function should not initiate any mounts or - unmounts that it will then wait for. - If the 'rcu_walk' parameter is true, then the caller is doing a pathwalk in RCU-walk mode. Sleeping is not permitted in this mode, and the caller can be asked to leave it and call again by returing diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-delayed-logging-design.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-delayed-logging-design.txt index 7445bf335dae..5282e3e51413 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-delayed-logging-design.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-delayed-logging-design.txt @@ -791,10 +791,3 @@ mount option. Fundamentally, there is no reason why the log manager would not be able to swap methods automatically and transparently depending on load characteristics, but this should not be necessary if delayed logging works as designed. - -Roadmap: - -2.6.39 Switch default mount option to use delayed logging - => should be roughly 12 months after initial merge - => enough time to shake out remaining problems before next round of - enterprise distro kernel rebases diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ads1015 b/Documentation/hwmon/ads1015 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f6fe9c203733 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ads1015 @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ +Kernel driver ads1015 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Texas Instruments ADS1015 + Prefix: 'ads1015' + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website : + http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ads1015.pdf + +Authors: + Dirk Eibach, Guntermann & Drunck GmbH <eibach@gdsys.de> + +Description +----------- + +This driver implements support for the Texas Instruments ADS1015. + +This device is a 12-bit A-D converter with 4 inputs. + +The inputs can be used single ended or in certain differential combinations. + +The inputs can be made available by 8 sysfs input files in0_input - in7_input: +in0: Voltage over AIN0 and AIN1. +in1: Voltage over AIN0 and AIN3. +in2: Voltage over AIN1 and AIN3. +in3: Voltage over AIN2 and AIN3. +in4: Voltage over AIN0 and GND. +in5: Voltage over AIN1 and GND. +in6: Voltage over AIN2 and GND. +in7: Voltage over AIN3 and GND. + +Which inputs are available can be configured using platform data or devicetree. + +By default all inputs are exported. + +Platform Data +------------- + +In linux/i2c/ads1015.h platform data is defined, channel_data contains +configuration data for the used input combinations: +- pga is the programmable gain amplifier (values are full scale) + 0: +/- 6.144 V + 1: +/- 4.096 V + 2: +/- 2.048 V + 3: +/- 1.024 V + 4: +/- 0.512 V + 5: +/- 0.256 V +- data_rate in samples per second + 0: 128 + 1: 250 + 2: 490 + 3: 920 + 4: 1600 + 5: 2400 + 6: 3300 + +Example: +struct ads1015_platform_data data = { + .channel_data = { + [2] = { .enabled = true, .pga = 1, .data_rate = 0 }, + [4] = { .enabled = true, .pga = 4, .data_rate = 5 }, + } +}; + +In this case only in2_input (FS +/- 4.096 V, 128 SPS) and in4_input +(FS +/- 0.512 V, 2400 SPS) would be created. + +Devicetree +---------- + +Configuration is also possible via devicetree: +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ads1015.txt diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg b/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg index a7952c2bd959..4d0bc70f1852 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg @@ -10,6 +10,10 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'f71862fg' Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space Datasheet: Available from the Fintek website + * Fintek F71869F and F71869E + Prefix: 'f71869' + Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space + Datasheet: Available from the Fintek website * Fintek F71882FG and F71883FG Prefix: 'f71882fg' Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space @@ -17,6 +21,10 @@ Supported chips: * Fintek F71889FG Prefix: 'f71889fg' Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space + Datasheet: Available from the Fintek website + * Fintek F71889ED + Prefix: 'f71889ed' + Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space Datasheet: Should become available on the Fintek website soon * Fintek F8000 Prefix: 'f8000' @@ -29,9 +37,9 @@ Author: Hans de Goede <hdegoede@redhat.com> Description ----------- -Fintek F718xxFG/F8000 Super I/O chips include complete hardware monitoring -capabilities. They can monitor up to 9 voltages (3 for the F8000), 4 fans and -3 temperature sensors. +Fintek F718xx/F8000 Super I/O chips include complete hardware monitoring +capabilities. They can monitor up to 9 voltages, 4 fans and 3 temperature +sensors. These chips also have fan controlling features, using either DC or PWM, in three different modes (one manual, two automatic). @@ -99,5 +107,5 @@ Writing an unsupported mode will result in an invalid parameter error. The fan speed is regulated to keep the temp the fan is mapped to between temp#_auto_point2_temp and temp#_auto_point3_temp. -Both of the automatic modes require that pwm1 corresponds to fan1, pwm2 to +All of the automatic modes require that pwm1 corresponds to fan1, pwm2 to fan2 and pwm3 to fan3. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/jc42 b/Documentation/hwmon/jc42 index 0e76ef12e4c6..a22ecf48f255 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/jc42 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/jc42 @@ -51,7 +51,8 @@ Supported chips: * JEDEC JC 42.4 compliant temperature sensor chips Prefix: 'jc42' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1f - Datasheet: - + Datasheet: + http://www.jedec.org/sites/default/files/docs/4_01_04R19.pdf Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com> @@ -60,7 +61,11 @@ Author: Description ----------- -This driver implements support for JEDEC JC 42.4 compliant temperature sensors. +This driver implements support for JEDEC JC 42.4 compliant temperature sensors, +which are used on many DDR3 memory modules for mobile devices and servers. Some +systems use the sensor to prevent memory overheating by automatically throttling +the memory controller. + The driver auto-detects the chips listed above, but can be manually instantiated to support other JC 42.4 compliant chips. @@ -81,15 +86,19 @@ limits. The chip supports only a single register to configure the hysteresis, which applies to all limits. This register can be written by writing into temp1_crit_hyst. Other hysteresis attributes are read-only. +If the BIOS has configured the sensor for automatic temperature management, it +is likely that it has locked the registers, i.e., that the temperature limits +cannot be changed. + Sysfs entries ------------- temp1_input Temperature (RO) -temp1_min Minimum temperature (RW) -temp1_max Maximum temperature (RW) -temp1_crit Critical high temperature (RW) +temp1_min Minimum temperature (RO or RW) +temp1_max Maximum temperature (RO or RW) +temp1_crit Critical high temperature (RO or RW) -temp1_crit_hyst Critical hysteresis temperature (RW) +temp1_crit_hyst Critical hysteresis temperature (RO or RW) temp1_max_hyst Maximum hysteresis temperature (RO) temp1_min_alarm Temperature low alarm diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/k10temp b/Documentation/hwmon/k10temp index 6526eee525a6..d2b56a4fd1f5 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/k10temp +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/k10temp @@ -9,6 +9,8 @@ Supported chips: Socket S1G3: Athlon II, Sempron, Turion II * AMD Family 11h processors: Socket S1G2: Athlon (X2), Sempron (X2), Turion X2 (Ultra) +* AMD Family 12h processors: "Llano" +* AMD Family 14h processors: "Brazos" (C/E/G-Series) Prefix: 'k10temp' Addresses scanned: PCI space @@ -17,10 +19,14 @@ Supported chips: http://support.amd.com/us/Processor_TechDocs/31116.pdf BIOS and Kernel Developer's Guide (BKDG) for AMD Family 11h Processors: http://support.amd.com/us/Processor_TechDocs/41256.pdf + BIOS and Kernel Developer's Guide (BKDG) for AMD Family 14h Models 00h-0Fh Processors: + http://support.amd.com/us/Processor_TechDocs/43170.pdf Revision Guide for AMD Family 10h Processors: http://support.amd.com/us/Processor_TechDocs/41322.pdf Revision Guide for AMD Family 11h Processors: http://support.amd.com/us/Processor_TechDocs/41788.pdf + Revision Guide for AMD Family 14h Models 00h-0Fh Processors: + http://support.amd.com/us/Processor_TechDocs/47534.pdf AMD Family 11h Processor Power and Thermal Data Sheet for Notebooks: http://support.amd.com/us/Processor_TechDocs/43373.pdf AMD Family 10h Server and Workstation Processor Power and Thermal Data Sheet: @@ -34,7 +40,7 @@ Description ----------- This driver permits reading of the internal temperature sensor of AMD -Family 10h and 11h processors. +Family 10h/11h/12h/14h processors. All these processors have a sensor, but on those for Socket F or AM2+, the sensor may return inconsistent values (erratum 319). The driver diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lineage-pem b/Documentation/hwmon/lineage-pem new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2ba5ed126858 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lineage-pem @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ +Kernel driver lineage-pem +========================= + +Supported devices: + * Lineage Compact Power Line Power Entry Modules + Prefix: 'lineage-pem' + Addresses scanned: - + Documentation: + http://www.lineagepower.com/oem/pdf/CPLI2C.pdf + +Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com> + + +Description +----------- + +This driver supports various Lineage Compact Power Line DC/DC and AC/DC +converters such as CP1800, CP2000AC, CP2000DC, CP2100DC, and others. + +Lineage CPL power entry modules are nominally PMBus compliant. However, most +standard PMBus commands are not supported. Specifically, all hardware monitoring +and status reporting commands are non-standard. For this reason, a standard +PMBus driver can not be used. + + +Usage Notes +----------- + +This driver does not probe for Lineage CPL devices, since there is no register +which can be safely used to identify the chip. You will have to instantiate +the devices explicitly. + +Example: the following will load the driver for a Lineage PEM at address 0x40 +on I2C bus #1: +$ modprobe lineage-pem +$ echo lineage-pem 0x40 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-1/new_device + +All Lineage CPL power entry modules have a built-in I2C bus master selector +(PCA9541). To ensure device access, this driver should only be used as client +driver to the pca9541 I2C master selector driver. + + +Sysfs entries +------------- + +All Lineage CPL devices report output voltage and device temperature as well as +alarms for output voltage, temperature, input voltage, input current, input power, +and fan status. + +Input voltage, input current, input power, and fan speed measurement is only +supported on newer devices. The driver detects if those attributes are supported, +and only creates respective sysfs entries if they are. + +in1_input Output voltage (mV) +in1_min_alarm Output undervoltage alarm +in1_max_alarm Output overvoltage alarm +in1_crit Output voltage critical alarm + +in2_input Input voltage (mV, optional) +in2_alarm Input voltage alarm + +curr1_input Input current (mA, optional) +curr1_alarm Input overcurrent alarm + +power1_input Input power (uW, optional) +power1_alarm Input power alarm + +fan1_input Fan 1 speed (rpm, optional) +fan2_input Fan 2 speed (rpm, optional) +fan3_input Fan 3 speed (rpm, optional) + +temp1_input +temp1_max +temp1_crit +temp1_alarm +temp1_crit_alarm +temp1_fault diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm75 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm75 index 8e6356fe05d7..a1790401fdde 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm75 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm75 @@ -7,6 +7,11 @@ Supported chips: Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website http://www.national.com/ + * National Semiconductor LM75A + Prefix: 'lm75a' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f + Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website + http://www.national.com/ * Dallas Semiconductor DS75 Prefix: 'lm75' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 index 239258a63c81..7c49feaa79d2 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 @@ -26,6 +26,14 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'emc6d102' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e Datasheet: http://www.smsc.com/main/catalog/emc6d102.html + * SMSC EMC6D103 + Prefix: 'emc6d103' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e + Datasheet: http://www.smsc.com/main/catalog/emc6d103.html + * SMSC EMC6D103S + Prefix: 'emc6d103s' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e + Datasheet: http://www.smsc.com/main/catalog/emc6d103s.html Authors: Philip Pokorny <ppokorny@penguincomputing.com>, @@ -122,9 +130,11 @@ to be register compatible. The EMC6D100 offers all the features of the EMC6D101 plus additional voltage monitoring and system control features. Unfortunately it is not possible to distinguish between the package versions on register level so these additional voltage inputs may read -zero. The EMC6D102 features addtional ADC bits thus extending precision +zero. EMC6D102 and EMC6D103 feature additional ADC bits thus extending precision of voltage and temperature channels. +SMSC EMC6D103S is similar to EMC6D103, but does not support pwm#_auto_pwm_minctl +and temp#_auto_temp_off. Hardware Configurations ----------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4151 b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4151 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..43c667e6677a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4151 @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +Kernel driver ltc4151 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Linear Technology LTC4151 + Prefix: 'ltc4151' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: + http://www.linear.com/docs/Datasheet/4151fc.pdf + +Author: Per Dalen <per.dalen@appeartv.com> + + +Description +----------- + +The LTC4151 is a High Voltage I2C Current and Voltage Monitor. + + +Usage Notes +----------- + +This driver does not probe for LTC4151 devices, since there is no register +which can be safely used to identify the chip. You will have to instantiate +the devices explicitly. + +Example: the following will load the driver for an LTC4151 at address 0x6f +on I2C bus #0: +# modprobe ltc4151 +# echo ltc4151 0x6f > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-0/new_device + + +Sysfs entries +------------- + +Voltage readings provided by this driver are reported as obtained from the ADIN +and VIN registers. + +Current reading provided by this driver is reported as obtained from the Current +Sense register. The reported value assumes that a 1 mOhm sense resistor is +installed. + +in1_input VDIN voltage (mV) + +in2_input ADIN voltage (mV) + +curr1_input SENSE current (mA) diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max6639 b/Documentation/hwmon/max6639 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..dc49f8be7167 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max6639 @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +Kernel driver max6639 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Maxim MAX6639 + Prefix: 'max6639' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2e, 0x2f + Datasheet: http://pdfserv.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX6639.pdf + +Authors: + He Changqing <hechangqing@semptian.com> + Roland Stigge <stigge@antcom.de> + +Description +----------- + +This driver implements support for the Maxim MAX6639. This chip is a 2-channel +temperature monitor with dual PWM fan speed controller. It can monitor its own +temperature and one external diode-connected transistor or two external +diode-connected transistors. + +The following device attributes are implemented via sysfs: + +Attribute R/W Contents +---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +temp1_input R Temperature channel 1 input (0..150 C) +temp2_input R Temperature channel 2 input (0..150 C) +temp1_fault R Temperature channel 1 diode fault +temp2_fault R Temperature channel 2 diode fault +temp1_max RW Set THERM temperature for input 1 + (in C, see datasheet) +temp2_max RW Set THERM temperature for input 2 +temp1_crit RW Set ALERT temperature for input 1 +temp2_crit RW Set ALERT temperature for input 2 +temp1_emergency RW Set OT temperature for input 1 + (in C, see datasheet) +temp2_emergency RW Set OT temperature for input 2 +pwm1 RW Fan 1 target duty cycle (0..255) +pwm2 RW Fan 2 target duty cycle (0..255) +fan1_input R TACH1 fan tachometer input (in RPM) +fan2_input R TACH2 fan tachometer input (in RPM) +fan1_fault R Fan 1 fault +fan2_fault R Fan 2 fault +temp1_max_alarm R Alarm on THERM temperature on channel 1 +temp2_max_alarm R Alarm on THERM temperature on channel 2 +temp1_crit_alarm R Alarm on ALERT temperature on channel 1 +temp2_crit_alarm R Alarm on ALERT temperature on channel 2 +temp1_emergency_alarm R Alarm on OT temperature on channel 1 +temp2_emergency_alarm R Alarm on OT temperature on channel 2 diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus b/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f2d42e8bdf48 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus @@ -0,0 +1,215 @@ +Kernel driver pmbus +==================== + +Supported chips: + * Ericsson BMR45X series + DC/DC Converter + Prefixes: 'bmr450', 'bmr451', 'bmr453', 'bmr454' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: + http://archive.ericsson.net/service/internet/picov/get?DocNo=28701-EN/LZT146395 + * Linear Technology LTC2978 + Octal PMBus Power Supply Monitor and Controller + Prefix: 'ltc2978' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://cds.linear.com/docs/Datasheet/2978fa.pdf + * Maxim MAX16064 + Quad Power-Supply Controller + Prefix: 'max16064' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX16064.pdf + * Maxim MAX34440 + PMBus 6-Channel Power-Supply Manager + Prefixes: 'max34440' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX34440.pdf + * Maxim MAX34441 + PMBus 5-Channel Power-Supply Manager and Intelligent Fan Controller + Prefixes: 'max34441' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX34441.pdf + * Maxim MAX8688 + Digital Power-Supply Controller/Monitor + Prefix: 'max8688' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX8688.pdf + * Generic PMBus devices + Prefix: 'pmbus' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: n.a. + +Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com> + + +Description +----------- + +This driver supports hardware montoring for various PMBus compliant devices. +It supports voltage, current, power, and temperature sensors as supported +by the device. + +Each monitored channel has its own high and low limits, plus a critical +limit. + +Fan support will be added in a later version of this driver. + + +Usage Notes +----------- + +This driver does not probe for PMBus devices, since there is no register +which can be safely used to identify the chip (The MFG_ID register is not +supported by all chips), and since there is no well defined address range for +PMBus devices. You will have to instantiate the devices explicitly. + +Example: the following will load the driver for an LTC2978 at address 0x60 +on I2C bus #1: +$ modprobe pmbus +$ echo ltc2978 0x60 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-1/new_device + + +Platform data support +--------------------- + +Support for additional PMBus chips can be added by defining chip parameters in +a new chip specific driver file. For example, (untested) code to add support for +Emerson DS1200 power modules might look as follows. + +static struct pmbus_driver_info ds1200_info = { + .pages = 1, + /* Note: All other sensors are in linear mode */ + .direct[PSC_VOLTAGE_OUT] = true, + .direct[PSC_TEMPERATURE] = true, + .direct[PSC_CURRENT_OUT] = true, + .m[PSC_VOLTAGE_IN] = 1, + .b[PSC_VOLTAGE_IN] = 0, + .R[PSC_VOLTAGE_IN] = 3, + .m[PSC_VOLTAGE_OUT] = 1, + .b[PSC_VOLTAGE_OUT] = 0, + .R[PSC_VOLTAGE_OUT] = 3, + .m[PSC_TEMPERATURE] = 1, + .b[PSC_TEMPERATURE] = 0, + .R[PSC_TEMPERATURE] = 3, + .func[0] = PMBUS_HAVE_VIN | PMBUS_HAVE_IIN | PMBUS_HAVE_STATUS_INPUT + | PMBUS_HAVE_VOUT | PMBUS_HAVE_STATUS_VOUT + | PMBUS_HAVE_IOUT | PMBUS_HAVE_STATUS_IOUT + | PMBUS_HAVE_PIN | PMBUS_HAVE_POUT + | PMBUS_HAVE_TEMP | PMBUS_HAVE_STATUS_TEMP + | PMBUS_HAVE_FAN12 | PMBUS_HAVE_STATUS_FAN12, +}; + +static int ds1200_probe(struct i2c_client *client, + const struct i2c_device_id *id) +{ + return pmbus_do_probe(client, id, &ds1200_info); +} + +static int ds1200_remove(struct i2c_client *client) +{ + return pmbus_do_remove(client); +} + +static const struct i2c_device_id ds1200_id[] = { + {"ds1200", 0}, + {} +}; + +MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(i2c, ds1200_id); + +/* This is the driver that will be inserted */ +static struct i2c_driver ds1200_driver = { + .driver = { + .name = "ds1200", + }, + .probe = ds1200_probe, + .remove = ds1200_remove, + .id_table = ds1200_id, +}; + +static int __init ds1200_init(void) +{ + return i2c_add_driver(&ds1200_driver); +} + +static void __exit ds1200_exit(void) +{ + i2c_del_driver(&ds1200_driver); +} + + +Sysfs entries +------------- + +When probing the chip, the driver identifies which PMBus registers are +supported, and determines available sensors from this information. +Attribute files only exist if respective sensors are suported by the chip. +Labels are provided to inform the user about the sensor associated with +a given sysfs entry. + +The following attributes are supported. Limits are read-write; all other +attributes are read-only. + +inX_input Measured voltage. From READ_VIN or READ_VOUT register. +inX_min Minumum Voltage. + From VIN_UV_WARN_LIMIT or VOUT_UV_WARN_LIMIT register. +inX_max Maximum voltage. + From VIN_OV_WARN_LIMIT or VOUT_OV_WARN_LIMIT register. +inX_lcrit Critical minumum Voltage. + From VIN_UV_FAULT_LIMIT or VOUT_UV_FAULT_LIMIT register. +inX_crit Critical maximum voltage. + From VIN_OV_FAULT_LIMIT or VOUT_OV_FAULT_LIMIT register. +inX_min_alarm Voltage low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_WARNING status. +inX_max_alarm Voltage high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_WARNING status. +inX_lcrit_alarm Voltage critical low alarm. + From VOLTAGE_UV_FAULT status. +inX_crit_alarm Voltage critical high alarm. + From VOLTAGE_OV_FAULT status. +inX_label "vin", "vcap", or "voutY" + +currX_input Measured current. From READ_IIN or READ_IOUT register. +currX_max Maximum current. + From IIN_OC_WARN_LIMIT or IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT register. +currX_lcrit Critical minumum output current. + From IOUT_UC_FAULT_LIMIT register. +currX_crit Critical maximum current. + From IIN_OC_FAULT_LIMIT or IOUT_OC_FAULT_LIMIT register. +currX_alarm Current high alarm. + From IIN_OC_WARNING or IOUT_OC_WARNING status. +currX_lcrit_alarm Output current critical low alarm. + From IOUT_UC_FAULT status. +currX_crit_alarm Current critical high alarm. + From IIN_OC_FAULT or IOUT_OC_FAULT status. +currX_label "iin" or "vinY" + +powerX_input Measured power. From READ_PIN or READ_POUT register. +powerX_cap Output power cap. From POUT_MAX register. +powerX_max Power limit. From PIN_OP_WARN_LIMIT or + POUT_OP_WARN_LIMIT register. +powerX_crit Critical output power limit. + From POUT_OP_FAULT_LIMIT register. +powerX_alarm Power high alarm. + From PIN_OP_WARNING or POUT_OP_WARNING status. +powerX_crit_alarm Output power critical high alarm. + From POUT_OP_FAULT status. +powerX_label "pin" or "poutY" + +tempX_input Measured tempererature. + From READ_TEMPERATURE_X register. +tempX_min Mimimum tempererature. From UT_WARN_LIMIT register. +tempX_max Maximum tempererature. From OT_WARN_LIMIT register. +tempX_lcrit Critical low tempererature. + From UT_FAULT_LIMIT register. +tempX_crit Critical high tempererature. + From OT_FAULT_LIMIT register. +tempX_min_alarm Chip temperature low alarm. Set by comparing + READ_TEMPERATURE_X with UT_WARN_LIMIT if + TEMP_UT_WARNING status is set. +tempX_max_alarm Chip temperature high alarm. Set by comparing + READ_TEMPERATURE_X with OT_WARN_LIMIT if + TEMP_OT_WARNING status is set. +tempX_lcrit_alarm Chip temperature critical low alarm. Set by comparing + READ_TEMPERATURE_X with UT_FAULT_LIMIT if + TEMP_UT_FAULT status is set. +tempX_crit_alarm Chip temperature critical high alarm. Set by comparing + READ_TEMPERATURE_X with OT_FAULT_LIMIT if + TEMP_OT_FAULT status is set. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/sch5627 b/Documentation/hwmon/sch5627 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..446a054e4912 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/sch5627 @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +Kernel driver sch5627 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * SMSC SCH5627 + Prefix: 'sch5627' + Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space + Datasheet: Application Note available upon request + +Author: Hans de Goede <hdegoede@redhat.com> + + +Description +----------- + +SMSC SCH5627 Super I/O chips include complete hardware monitoring +capabilities. They can monitor up to 5 voltages, 4 fans and 8 temperatures. + +The hardware monitoring part of the SMSC SCH5627 is accessed by talking +through an embedded microcontroller. An application note describing the +protocol for communicating with the microcontroller is available upon +request. Please mail me if you want a copy. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface index c6559f153589..83a698773ade 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface @@ -187,6 +187,17 @@ fan[1-*]_div Fan divisor. Note that this is actually an internal clock divisor, which affects the measurable speed range, not the read value. +fan[1-*]_pulses Number of tachometer pulses per fan revolution. + Integer value, typically between 1 and 4. + RW + This value is a characteristic of the fan connected to the + device's input, so it has to be set in accordance with the fan + model. + Should only be created if the chip has a register to configure + the number of pulses. In the absence of such a register (and + thus attribute) the value assumed by all devices is 2 pulses + per fan revolution. + fan[1-*]_target Desired fan speed Unit: revolution/min (RPM) diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/twl4030-madc-hwmon b/Documentation/hwmon/twl4030-madc-hwmon new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ef7984317cec --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/twl4030-madc-hwmon @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +Kernel driver twl4030-madc +========================= + +Supported chips: + * Texas Instruments TWL4030 + Prefix: 'twl4030-madc' + + +Authors: + J Keerthy <j-keerthy@ti.com> + +Description +----------- + +The Texas Instruments TWL4030 is a Power Management and Audio Circuit. Among +other things it contains a 10-bit A/D converter MADC. The converter has 16 +channels which can be used in different modes. + + +See this table for the meaning of the different channels + +Channel Signal +------------------------------------------ +0 Battery type(BTYPE) +1 BCI: Battery temperature (BTEMP) +2 GP analog input +3 GP analog input +4 GP analog input +5 GP analog input +6 GP analog input +7 GP analog input +8 BCI: VBUS voltage(VBUS) +9 Backup Battery voltage (VBKP) +10 BCI: Battery charger current (ICHG) +11 BCI: Battery charger voltage (VCHG) +12 BCI: Main battery voltage (VBAT) +13 Reserved +14 Reserved +15 VRUSB Supply/Speaker left/Speaker right polarization level + + +The Sysfs nodes will represent the voltage in the units of mV, +the temperature channel shows the converted temperature in +degree celcius. The Battery charging current channel represents +battery charging current in mA. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83627ehf b/Documentation/hwmon/w83627ehf index 13d556112fc0..76ffef94ed75 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83627ehf +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83627ehf @@ -5,13 +5,11 @@ Supported chips: * Winbond W83627EHF/EHG (ISA access ONLY) Prefix: 'w83627ehf' Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers - Datasheet: - http://www.nuvoton.com.tw/NR/rdonlyres/A6A258F0-F0C9-4F97-81C0-C4D29E7E943E/0/W83627EHF.pdf + Datasheet: not available * Winbond W83627DHG Prefix: 'w83627dhg' Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers - Datasheet: - http://www.nuvoton.com.tw/NR/rdonlyres/7885623D-A487-4CF9-A47F-30C5F73D6FE6/0/W83627DHG.pdf + Datasheet: not available * Winbond W83627DHG-P Prefix: 'w83627dhg' Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers @@ -24,6 +22,14 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'w83667hg' Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request + * Nuvoton NCT6775F/W83667HG-I + Prefix: 'nct6775' + Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers + Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request + * Nuvoton NCT6776F + Prefix: 'nct6776' + Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers + Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request Authors: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> @@ -36,19 +42,28 @@ Description ----------- This driver implements support for the Winbond W83627EHF, W83627EHG, -W83627DHG, W83627DHG-P, W83667HG and W83667HG-B super I/O chips. -We will refer to them collectively as Winbond chips. - -The chips implement three temperature sensors, five fan rotation -speed sensors, ten analog voltage sensors (only nine for the 627DHG), one -VID (6 pins for the 627EHF/EHG, 8 pins for the 627DHG and 667HG), alarms -with beep warnings (control unimplemented), and some automatic fan -regulation strategies (plus manual fan control mode). +W83627DHG, W83627DHG-P, W83667HG, W83667HG-B, W83667HG-I (NCT6775F), +and NCT6776F super I/O chips. We will refer to them collectively as +Winbond chips. + +The chips implement three temperature sensors (up to four for 667HG-B, and nine +for NCT6775F and NCT6776F), five fan rotation speed sensors, ten analog voltage +sensors (only nine for the 627DHG), one VID (6 pins for the 627EHF/EHG, 8 pins +for the 627DHG and 667HG), alarms with beep warnings (control unimplemented), +and some automatic fan regulation strategies (plus manual fan control mode). + +The temperature sensor sources on W82677HG-B, NCT6775F, and NCT6776F are +configurable. temp4 and higher attributes are only reported if its temperature +source differs from the temperature sources of the already reported temperature +sensors. The configured source for each of the temperature sensors is provided +in tempX_label. Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius and measurement resolution is 1 -degC for temp1 and 0.5 degC for temp2 and temp3. An alarm is triggered when -the temperature gets higher than high limit; it stays on until the temperature -falls below the hysteresis value. +degC for temp1 and and 0.5 degC for temp2 and temp3. For temp4 and higher, +resolution is 1 degC for W83667HG-B and 0.0 degC for NCT6775F and NCT6776F. +An alarm is triggered when the temperature gets higher than high limit; +it stays on until the temperature falls below the hysteresis value. +Alarms are only supported for temp1, temp2, and temp3. Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. Fan @@ -80,7 +95,8 @@ prog -> pwm4 (not on 667HG and 667HG-B; the programmable setting is not name - this is a standard hwmon device entry. For the W83627EHF and W83627EHG, it is set to "w83627ehf", for the W83627DHG it is set to "w83627dhg", - and for the W83667HG it is set to "w83667hg". + for the W83667HG and W83667HG-B it is set to "w83667hg", for NCT6775F it + is set to "nct6775", and for NCT6776F it is set to "nct6776". pwm[1-4] - this file stores PWM duty cycle or DC value (fan speed) in range: 0 (stop) to 255 (full) @@ -90,6 +106,18 @@ pwm[1-4]_enable - this file controls mode of fan/temperature control: * 2 "Thermal Cruise" mode * 3 "Fan Speed Cruise" mode * 4 "Smart Fan III" mode + * 5 "Smart Fan IV" mode + + SmartFan III mode is not supported on NCT6776F. + + SmartFan IV mode is configurable only if it was configured at system + startup, and is only supported for W83677HG-B, NCT6775F, and NCT6776F. + SmartFan IV operational parameters can not be configured at this time, + and the various pwm attributes are not used in SmartFan IV mode. + The attributes can be written to, which is useful if you plan to + configure the system for a different pwm mode. However, the information + returned when reading pwm attributes is unrelated to SmartFan IV + operation. pwm[1-4]_mode - controls if output is PWM or DC level * 0 DC output (0 - 12v) diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83795 b/Documentation/hwmon/w83795 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9f160371f463 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83795 @@ -0,0 +1,127 @@ +Kernel driver w83795 +==================== + +Supported chips: + * Winbond/Nuvoton W83795G + Prefix: 'w83795g' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2f + Datasheet: Available for download on nuvoton.com + * Winbond/Nuvoton W83795ADG + Prefix: 'w83795adg' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2f + Datasheet: Available for download on nuvoton.com + +Authors: + Wei Song (Nuvoton) + Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> + + +Pin mapping +----------- + +Here is a summary of the pin mapping for the W83795G and W83795ADG. +This can be useful to convert data provided by board manufacturers +into working libsensors configuration statements. + + W83795G | + Pin | Name | Register | Sysfs attribute +------------------------------------------------------------------ + 13 | VSEN1 (VCORE1) | 10h | in0 + 14 | VSEN2 (VCORE2) | 11h | in1 + 15 | VSEN3 (VCORE3) | 12h | in2 + 16 | VSEN4 | 13h | in3 + 17 | VSEN5 | 14h | in4 + 18 | VSEN6 | 15h | in5 + 19 | VSEN7 | 16h | in6 + 20 | VSEN8 | 17h | in7 + 21 | VSEN9 | 18h | in8 + 22 | VSEN10 | 19h | in9 + 23 | VSEN11 | 1Ah | in10 + 28 | VTT | 1Bh | in11 + 24 | 3VDD | 1Ch | in12 + 25 | 3VSB | 1Dh | in13 + 26 | VBAT | 1Eh | in14 + 3 | VSEN12/TR5 | 1Fh | in15/temp5 + 4 | VSEN13/TR5 | 20h | in16/temp6 + 5/ 6 | VDSEN14/TR1/TD1 | 21h | in17/temp1 + 7/ 8 | VDSEN15/TR2/TD2 | 22h | in18/temp2 + 9/ 10 | VDSEN16/TR3/TD3 | 23h | in19/temp3 + 11/ 12 | VDSEN17/TR4/TD4 | 24h | in20/temp4 + 40 | FANIN1 | 2Eh | fan1 + 42 | FANIN2 | 2Fh | fan2 + 44 | FANIN3 | 30h | fan3 + 46 | FANIN4 | 31h | fan4 + 48 | FANIN5 | 32h | fan5 + 50 | FANIN6 | 33h | fan6 + 52 | FANIN7 | 34h | fan7 + 54 | FANIN8 | 35h | fan8 + 57 | FANIN9 | 36h | fan9 + 58 | FANIN10 | 37h | fan10 + 59 | FANIN11 | 38h | fan11 + 60 | FANIN12 | 39h | fan12 + 31 | FANIN13 | 3Ah | fan13 + 35 | FANIN14 | 3Bh | fan14 + 41 | FANCTL1 | 10h (bank 2) | pwm1 + 43 | FANCTL2 | 11h (bank 2) | pwm2 + 45 | FANCTL3 | 12h (bank 2) | pwm3 + 47 | FANCTL4 | 13h (bank 2) | pwm4 + 49 | FANCTL5 | 14h (bank 2) | pwm5 + 51 | FANCTL6 | 15h (bank 2) | pwm6 + 53 | FANCTL7 | 16h (bank 2) | pwm7 + 55 | FANCTL8 | 17h (bank 2) | pwm8 + 29/ 30 | PECI/TSI (DTS1) | 26h | temp7 + 29/ 30 | PECI/TSI (DTS2) | 27h | temp8 + 29/ 30 | PECI/TSI (DTS3) | 28h | temp9 + 29/ 30 | PECI/TSI (DTS4) | 29h | temp10 + 29/ 30 | PECI/TSI (DTS5) | 2Ah | temp11 + 29/ 30 | PECI/TSI (DTS6) | 2Bh | temp12 + 29/ 30 | PECI/TSI (DTS7) | 2Ch | temp13 + 29/ 30 | PECI/TSI (DTS8) | 2Dh | temp14 + 27 | CASEOPEN# | 46h | intrusion0 + + W83795ADG | + Pin | Name | Register | Sysfs attribute +------------------------------------------------------------------ + 10 | VSEN1 (VCORE1) | 10h | in0 + 11 | VSEN2 (VCORE2) | 11h | in1 + 12 | VSEN3 (VCORE3) | 12h | in2 + 13 | VSEN4 | 13h | in3 + 14 | VSEN5 | 14h | in4 + 15 | VSEN6 | 15h | in5 + 16 | VSEN7 | 16h | in6 + 17 | VSEN8 | 17h | in7 + 22 | VTT | 1Bh | in11 + 18 | 3VDD | 1Ch | in12 + 19 | 3VSB | 1Dh | in13 + 20 | VBAT | 1Eh | in14 + 48 | VSEN12/TR5 | 1Fh | in15/temp5 + 1 | VSEN13/TR5 | 20h | in16/temp6 + 2/ 3 | VDSEN14/TR1/TD1 | 21h | in17/temp1 + 4/ 5 | VDSEN15/TR2/TD2 | 22h | in18/temp2 + 6/ 7 | VDSEN16/TR3/TD3 | 23h | in19/temp3 + 8/ 9 | VDSEN17/TR4/TD4 | 24h | in20/temp4 + 32 | FANIN1 | 2Eh | fan1 + 34 | FANIN2 | 2Fh | fan2 + 36 | FANIN3 | 30h | fan3 + 37 | FANIN4 | 31h | fan4 + 38 | FANIN5 | 32h | fan5 + 39 | FANIN6 | 33h | fan6 + 40 | FANIN7 | 34h | fan7 + 41 | FANIN8 | 35h | fan8 + 43 | FANIN9 | 36h | fan9 + 44 | FANIN10 | 37h | fan10 + 45 | FANIN11 | 38h | fan11 + 46 | FANIN12 | 39h | fan12 + 24 | FANIN13 | 3Ah | fan13 + 28 | FANIN14 | 3Bh | fan14 + 33 | FANCTL1 | 10h (bank 2) | pwm1 + 35 | FANCTL2 | 11h (bank 2) | pwm2 + 23 | PECI (DTS1) | 26h | temp7 + 23 | PECI (DTS2) | 27h | temp8 + 23 | PECI (DTS3) | 28h | temp9 + 23 | PECI (DTS4) | 29h | temp10 + 23 | PECI (DTS5) | 2Ah | temp11 + 23 | PECI (DTS6) | 2Bh | temp12 + 23 | PECI (DTS7) | 2Ch | temp13 + 23 | PECI (DTS8) | 2Dh | temp14 + 21 | CASEOPEN# | 46h | intrusion0 diff --git a/Documentation/hwspinlock.txt b/Documentation/hwspinlock.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7dcd1a4e726c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwspinlock.txt @@ -0,0 +1,293 @@ +Hardware Spinlock Framework + +1. Introduction + +Hardware spinlock modules provide hardware assistance for synchronization +and mutual exclusion between heterogeneous processors and those not operating +under a single, shared operating system. + +For example, OMAP4 has dual Cortex-A9, dual Cortex-M3 and a C64x+ DSP, +each of which is running a different Operating System (the master, A9, +is usually running Linux and the slave processors, the M3 and the DSP, +are running some flavor of RTOS). + +A generic hwspinlock framework allows platform-independent drivers to use +the hwspinlock device in order to access data structures that are shared +between remote processors, that otherwise have no alternative mechanism +to accomplish synchronization and mutual exclusion operations. + +This is necessary, for example, for Inter-processor communications: +on OMAP4, cpu-intensive multimedia tasks are offloaded by the host to the +remote M3 and/or C64x+ slave processors (by an IPC subsystem called Syslink). + +To achieve fast message-based communications, a minimal kernel support +is needed to deliver messages arriving from a remote processor to the +appropriate user process. + +This communication is based on simple data structures that is shared between +the remote processors, and access to it is synchronized using the hwspinlock +module (remote processor directly places new messages in this shared data +structure). + +A common hwspinlock interface makes it possible to have generic, platform- +independent, drivers. + +2. User API + + struct hwspinlock *hwspin_lock_request(void); + - dynamically assign an hwspinlock and return its address, or NULL + in case an unused hwspinlock isn't available. Users of this + API will usually want to communicate the lock's id to the remote core + before it can be used to achieve synchronization. + Can be called from an atomic context (this function will not sleep) but + not from within interrupt context. + + struct hwspinlock *hwspin_lock_request_specific(unsigned int id); + - assign a specific hwspinlock id and return its address, or NULL + if that hwspinlock is already in use. Usually board code will + be calling this function in order to reserve specific hwspinlock + ids for predefined purposes. + Can be called from an atomic context (this function will not sleep) but + not from within interrupt context. + + int hwspin_lock_free(struct hwspinlock *hwlock); + - free a previously-assigned hwspinlock; returns 0 on success, or an + appropriate error code on failure (e.g. -EINVAL if the hwspinlock + is already free). + Can be called from an atomic context (this function will not sleep) but + not from within interrupt context. + + int hwspin_lock_timeout(struct hwspinlock *hwlock, unsigned int timeout); + - lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock with a timeout limit (specified in + msecs). If the hwspinlock is already taken, the function will busy loop + waiting for it to be released, but give up when the timeout elapses. + Upon a successful return from this function, preemption is disabled so + the caller must not sleep, and is advised to release the hwspinlock as + soon as possible, in order to minimize remote cores polling on the + hardware interconnect. + Returns 0 when successful and an appropriate error code otherwise (most + notably -ETIMEDOUT if the hwspinlock is still busy after timeout msecs). + The function will never sleep. + + int hwspin_lock_timeout_irq(struct hwspinlock *hwlock, unsigned int timeout); + - lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock with a timeout limit (specified in + msecs). If the hwspinlock is already taken, the function will busy loop + waiting for it to be released, but give up when the timeout elapses. + Upon a successful return from this function, preemption and the local + interrupts are disabled, so the caller must not sleep, and is advised to + release the hwspinlock as soon as possible. + Returns 0 when successful and an appropriate error code otherwise (most + notably -ETIMEDOUT if the hwspinlock is still busy after timeout msecs). + The function will never sleep. + + int hwspin_lock_timeout_irqsave(struct hwspinlock *hwlock, unsigned int to, + unsigned long *flags); + - lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock with a timeout limit (specified in + msecs). If the hwspinlock is already taken, the function will busy loop + waiting for it to be released, but give up when the timeout elapses. + Upon a successful return from this function, preemption is disabled, + local interrupts are disabled and their previous state is saved at the + given flags placeholder. The caller must not sleep, and is advised to + release the hwspinlock as soon as possible. + Returns 0 when successful and an appropriate error code otherwise (most + notably -ETIMEDOUT if the hwspinlock is still busy after timeout msecs). + The function will never sleep. + + int hwspin_trylock(struct hwspinlock *hwlock); + - attempt to lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock, but immediately fail if + it is already taken. + Upon a successful return from this function, preemption is disabled so + caller must not sleep, and is advised to release the hwspinlock as soon as + possible, in order to minimize remote cores polling on the hardware + interconnect. + Returns 0 on success and an appropriate error code otherwise (most + notably -EBUSY if the hwspinlock was already taken). + The function will never sleep. + + int hwspin_trylock_irq(struct hwspinlock *hwlock); + - attempt to lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock, but immediately fail if + it is already taken. + Upon a successful return from this function, preemption and the local + interrupts are disabled so caller must not sleep, and is advised to + release the hwspinlock as soon as possible. + Returns 0 on success and an appropriate error code otherwise (most + notably -EBUSY if the hwspinlock was already taken). + The function will never sleep. + + int hwspin_trylock_irqsave(struct hwspinlock *hwlock, unsigned long *flags); + - attempt to lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock, but immediately fail if + it is already taken. + Upon a successful return from this function, preemption is disabled, + the local interrupts are disabled and their previous state is saved + at the given flags placeholder. The caller must not sleep, and is advised + to release the hwspinlock as soon as possible. + Returns 0 on success and an appropriate error code otherwise (most + notably -EBUSY if the hwspinlock was already taken). + The function will never sleep. + + void hwspin_unlock(struct hwspinlock *hwlock); + - unlock a previously-locked hwspinlock. Always succeed, and can be called + from any context (the function never sleeps). Note: code should _never_ + unlock an hwspinlock which is already unlocked (there is no protection + against this). + + void hwspin_unlock_irq(struct hwspinlock *hwlock); + - unlock a previously-locked hwspinlock and enable local interrupts. + The caller should _never_ unlock an hwspinlock which is already unlocked. + Doing so is considered a bug (there is no protection against this). + Upon a successful return from this function, preemption and local + interrupts are enabled. This function will never sleep. + + void + hwspin_unlock_irqrestore(struct hwspinlock *hwlock, unsigned long *flags); + - unlock a previously-locked hwspinlock. + The caller should _never_ unlock an hwspinlock which is already unlocked. + Doing so is considered a bug (there is no protection against this). + Upon a successful return from this function, preemption is reenabled, + and the state of the local interrupts is restored to the state saved at + the given flags. This function will never sleep. + + int hwspin_lock_get_id(struct hwspinlock *hwlock); + - retrieve id number of a given hwspinlock. This is needed when an + hwspinlock is dynamically assigned: before it can be used to achieve + mutual exclusion with a remote cpu, the id number should be communicated + to the remote task with which we want to synchronize. + Returns the hwspinlock id number, or -EINVAL if hwlock is null. + +3. Typical usage + +#include <linux/hwspinlock.h> +#include <linux/err.h> + +int hwspinlock_example1(void) +{ + struct hwspinlock *hwlock; + int ret; + + /* dynamically assign a hwspinlock */ + hwlock = hwspin_lock_request(); + if (!hwlock) + ... + + id = hwspin_lock_get_id(hwlock); + /* probably need to communicate id to a remote processor now */ + + /* take the lock, spin for 1 sec if it's already taken */ + ret = hwspin_lock_timeout(hwlock, 1000); + if (ret) + ... + + /* + * we took the lock, do our thing now, but do NOT sleep + */ + + /* release the lock */ + hwspin_unlock(hwlock); + + /* free the lock */ + ret = hwspin_lock_free(hwlock); + if (ret) + ... + + return ret; +} + +int hwspinlock_example2(void) +{ + struct hwspinlock *hwlock; + int ret; + + /* + * assign a specific hwspinlock id - this should be called early + * by board init code. + */ + hwlock = hwspin_lock_request_specific(PREDEFINED_LOCK_ID); + if (!hwlock) + ... + + /* try to take it, but don't spin on it */ + ret = hwspin_trylock(hwlock); + if (!ret) { + pr_info("lock is already taken\n"); + return -EBUSY; + } + + /* + * we took the lock, do our thing now, but do NOT sleep + */ + + /* release the lock */ + hwspin_unlock(hwlock); + + /* free the lock */ + ret = hwspin_lock_free(hwlock); + if (ret) + ... + + return ret; +} + + +4. API for implementors + + int hwspin_lock_register(struct hwspinlock *hwlock); + - to be called from the underlying platform-specific implementation, in + order to register a new hwspinlock instance. Can be called from an atomic + context (this function will not sleep) but not from within interrupt + context. Returns 0 on success, or appropriate error code on failure. + + struct hwspinlock *hwspin_lock_unregister(unsigned int id); + - to be called from the underlying vendor-specific implementation, in order + to unregister an existing (and unused) hwspinlock instance. + Can be called from an atomic context (will not sleep) but not from + within interrupt context. + Returns the address of hwspinlock on success, or NULL on error (e.g. + if the hwspinlock is sill in use). + +5. struct hwspinlock + +This struct represents an hwspinlock instance. It is registered by the +underlying hwspinlock implementation using the hwspin_lock_register() API. + +/** + * struct hwspinlock - vendor-specific hwspinlock implementation + * + * @dev: underlying device, will be used with runtime PM api + * @ops: vendor-specific hwspinlock handlers + * @id: a global, unique, system-wide, index of the lock. + * @lock: initialized and used by hwspinlock core + * @owner: underlying implementation module, used to maintain module ref count + */ +struct hwspinlock { + struct device *dev; + const struct hwspinlock_ops *ops; + int id; + spinlock_t lock; + struct module *owner; +}; + +The underlying implementation is responsible to assign the dev, ops, id and +owner members. The lock member, OTOH, is initialized and used by the hwspinlock +core. + +6. Implementation callbacks + +There are three possible callbacks defined in 'struct hwspinlock_ops': + +struct hwspinlock_ops { + int (*trylock)(struct hwspinlock *lock); + void (*unlock)(struct hwspinlock *lock); + void (*relax)(struct hwspinlock *lock); +}; + +The first two callbacks are mandatory: + +The ->trylock() callback should make a single attempt to take the lock, and +return 0 on failure and 1 on success. This callback may _not_ sleep. + +The ->unlock() callback releases the lock. It always succeed, and it, too, +may _not_ sleep. + +The ->relax() callback is optional. It is called by hwspinlock core while +spinning on a lock, and can be used by the underlying implementation to force +a delay between two successive invocations of ->trylock(). It may _not_ sleep. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-diolan-u2c b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-diolan-u2c new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..30fe4bb9a069 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-diolan-u2c @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +Kernel driver i2c-diolan-u2c + +Supported adapters: + * Diolan U2C-12 I2C-USB adapter + Documentation: + http://www.diolan.com/i2c/u2c12.html + +Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com> + +Description +----------- + +This is the driver for the Diolan U2C-12 USB-I2C adapter. + +The Diolan U2C-12 I2C-USB Adapter provides a low cost solution to connect +a computer to I2C slave devices using a USB interface. It also supports +connectivity to SPI devices. + +This driver only supports the I2C interface of U2C-12. The driver does not use +interrupts. + + +Module parameters +----------------- + +* frequency: I2C bus frequency diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 index 93fe76e56522..6df69765ccb7 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 +++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 @@ -16,8 +16,9 @@ Supported adapters: * Intel EP80579 (Tolapai) * Intel 82801JI (ICH10) * Intel 5/3400 Series (PCH) - * Intel Cougar Point (PCH) + * Intel 6 Series (PCH) * Intel Patsburg (PCH) + * Intel DH89xxCC (PCH) Datasheets: Publicly available at the Intel website On Intel Patsburg and later chipsets, both the normal host SMBus controller diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices b/Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices index 87da405a8597..9edb75d8c9b9 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices +++ b/Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ static int __devinit usb_hcd_pnx4008_probe(struct platform_device *pdev) (...) i2c_adap = i2c_get_adapter(2); memset(&i2c_info, 0, sizeof(struct i2c_board_info)); - strlcpy(i2c_info.name, "isp1301_pnx", I2C_NAME_SIZE); + strlcpy(i2c_info.type, "isp1301_pnx", I2C_NAME_SIZE); isp1301_i2c_client = i2c_new_probed_device(i2c_adap, &i2c_info, normal_i2c, NULL); i2c_put_adapter(i2c_adap); diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/upgrading-clients b/Documentation/i2c/upgrading-clients index 9a45f9bb6a25..d6991625c407 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/upgrading-clients +++ b/Documentation/i2c/upgrading-clients @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ static int example_attach(struct i2c_adapter *adap, int addr, int kind) return 0; } -static int __devexit example_detach(struct i2c_client *client) +static int example_detach(struct i2c_client *client) { struct example_state *state = i2c_get_clientdata(client); @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ static struct i2c_driver example_driver = { .name = "example", }, .attach_adapter = example_attach_adapter, - .detach_client = __devexit_p(example_detach), + .detach_client = example_detach, .suspend = example_suspend, .resume = example_resume, }; @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Updating the client The new style binding model will check against a list of supported devices and their associated address supplied by the code registering the busses. This means that the driver .attach_adapter and -.detach_adapter methods can be removed, along with the addr_data, +.detach_client methods can be removed, along with the addr_data, as follows: - static struct i2c_driver example_driver; @@ -110,14 +110,14 @@ as follows: static struct i2c_driver example_driver = { - .attach_adapter = example_attach_adapter, -- .detach_client = __devexit_p(example_detach), +- .detach_client = example_detach, } Add the probe and remove methods to the i2c_driver, as so: static struct i2c_driver example_driver = { + .probe = example_probe, -+ .remove = __devexit_p(example_remove), ++ .remove = example_remove, } Change the example_attach method to accept the new parameters @@ -199,8 +199,8 @@ to delete the i2c_detach_client call. It is possible that you can also remove the ret variable as it is not not needed for any of the core functions. -- static int __devexit example_detach(struct i2c_client *client) -+ static int __devexit example_remove(struct i2c_client *client) +- static int example_detach(struct i2c_client *client) ++ static int example_remove(struct i2c_client *client) { struct example_state *state = i2c_get_clientdata(client); @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ static int example_probe(struct i2c_client *client, return 0; } -static int __devexit example_remove(struct i2c_client *client) +static int example_remove(struct i2c_client *client) { struct example_state *state = i2c_get_clientdata(client); @@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ static struct i2c_driver example_driver = { }, .id_table = example_idtable, .probe = example_probe, - .remove = __devexit_p(example_remove), + .remove = example_remove, .suspend = example_suspend, .resume = example_resume, }; diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt index ac293e955308..e68543f767d5 100644 --- a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt +++ b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt @@ -133,6 +133,7 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments 'H' C0-DF net/bluetooth/hidp/hidp.h conflict! 'H' C0-DF net/bluetooth/cmtp/cmtp.h conflict! 'H' C0-DF net/bluetooth/bnep/bnep.h conflict! +'H' F1 linux/hid-roccat.h <mailto:erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> 'I' all linux/isdn.h conflict! 'I' 00-0F drivers/isdn/divert/isdn_divert.h conflict! 'I' 40-4F linux/mISDNif.h conflict! diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt index 4a990317b84a..f1431d099fce 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ INSTALL_MOD_STRIP INSTALL_MOD_STRIP, if defined, will cause modules to be stripped after they are installed. If INSTALL_MOD_STRIP is '1', then the default option --strip-debug will be used. Otherwise, -INSTALL_MOD_STRIP will used as the options to the strip command. +INSTALL_MOD_STRIP value will be used as the options to the strip command. INSTALL_FW_PATH -------------------------------------------------- @@ -196,3 +196,8 @@ to be included in the databases, separated by blank space. E.g.: To get all available archs you can also specify all. E.g.: $ make ALLSOURCE_ARCHS=all tags + +KBUILD_ENABLE_EXTRA_GCC_CHECKS +-------------------------------------------------- +If enabled over the make command line with "W=1", it turns on additional +gcc -W... options for more extensive build-time checking. diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt index 86e3cd0d26a0..5d145bb443c0 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt @@ -1325,7 +1325,8 @@ The top Makefile exports the following variables: If this variable is specified, will cause modules to be stripped after they are installed. If INSTALL_MOD_STRIP is '1', then the default option --strip-debug will be used. Otherwise, - INSTALL_MOD_STRIP will used as the option(s) to the strip command. + INSTALL_MOD_STRIP value will be used as the option(s) to the strip + command. === 9 Makefile language diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 89835a4766a6..c357a31411cd 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -144,6 +144,11 @@ a fixed number of characters. This limit depends on the architecture and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file ./include/asm/setup.h as COMMAND_LINE_SIZE. +Finally, the [KMG] suffix is commonly described after a number of kernel +parameter values. These 'K', 'M', and 'G' letters represent the _binary_ +multipliers 'Kilo', 'Mega', and 'Giga', equalling 2^10, 2^20, and 2^30 +bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. + acpi= [HW,ACPI,X86] Advanced Configuration and Power Interface @@ -545,16 +550,20 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file Format: <first_slot>,<last_slot>,<port>,<enum_bit>[,<debug>] - crashkernel=nn[KMG]@ss[KMG] - [KNL] Reserve a chunk of physical memory to - hold a kernel to switch to with kexec on panic. + crashkernel=size[KMG][@offset[KMG]] + [KNL] Using kexec, Linux can switch to a 'crash kernel' + upon panic. This parameter reserves the physical + memory region [offset, offset + size] for that kernel + image. If '@offset' is omitted, then a suitable offset + is selected automatically. Check + Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt for further details. crashkernel=range1:size1[,range2:size2,...][@offset] [KNL] Same as above, but depends on the memory in the running system. The syntax of range is start-[end] where start and end are both a memory unit (amount[KMG]). See also - Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt for a example. + Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt for an example. cs89x0_dma= [HW,NET] Format: <dma> @@ -617,6 +626,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file disable= [IPV6] See Documentation/networking/ipv6.txt. + disable_ddw [PPC/PSERIES] + Disable Dynamic DMA Window support. Use this if + to workaround buggy firmware. + disable_ipv6= [IPV6] See Documentation/networking/ipv6.txt. @@ -859,6 +872,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file If specified, z/VM IUCV HVC accepts connections from listed z/VM user IDs only. + keep_bootcon [KNL] + Do not unregister boot console at start. This is only + useful for debugging when something happens in the window + between unregistering the boot console and initializing + the real console. + i2c_bus= [HW] Override the default board specific I2C bus speed or register an additional I2C bus that is not registered from board initialization code. @@ -1262,10 +1281,9 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file 6 (KERN_INFO) informational 7 (KERN_DEBUG) debug-level messages - log_buf_len=n Sets the size of the printk ring buffer, in bytes. - Format: { n | nk | nM } - n must be a power of two. The default size - is set in the kernel config file. + log_buf_len=n[KMG] Sets the size of the printk ring buffer, + in bytes. n must be a power of two. The default + size is set in the kernel config file. logo.nologo [FB] Disables display of the built-in Linux logo. This may be used to provide more screen space for @@ -1572,16 +1590,25 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file of returning the full 64-bit number. The default is to return 64-bit inode numbers. + nfs.nfs4_disable_idmapping= + [NFSv4] When set, this option disables the NFSv4 + idmapper on the client, but only if the mount + is using the 'sec=sys' security flavour. This may + make migration from legacy NFSv2/v3 systems easier + provided that the server has the appropriate support. + The default is to always enable NFSv4 idmapping. + nmi_debug= [KNL,AVR32,SH] Specify one or more actions to take when a NMI is triggered. Format: [state][,regs][,debounce][,die] nmi_watchdog= [KNL,BUGS=X86] Debugging features for SMP kernels - Format: [panic,][num] + Format: [panic,][nopanic,][num] Valid num: 0 0 - turn nmi_watchdog off When panic is specified, panic when an NMI watchdog - timeout occurs. + timeout occurs (or 'nopanic' to override the opposite + default). This is useful when you use a panic=... timeout and need the box quickly up again. @@ -1805,6 +1832,11 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file perfmon on Intel CPUs instead of the CPU specific event set. + oops=panic Always panic on oopses. Default is to just kill the process, + but there is a small probability of deadlocking the machine. + This will also cause panics on machine check exceptions. + Useful together with panic=30 to trigger a reboot. + OSS [HW,OSS] See Documentation/sound/oss/oss-parameters.txt @@ -2436,6 +2468,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file <deci-seconds>: poll all this frequency 0: no polling (default) + threadirqs [KNL] + Force threading of all interrupt handlers except those + marked explicitely IRQF_NO_THREAD. + topology= [S390] Format: {off | on} Specify if the kernel should make use of the cpu diff --git a/Documentation/keys-request-key.txt b/Documentation/keys-request-key.txt index 09b55e461740..69686ad12c66 100644 --- a/Documentation/keys-request-key.txt +++ b/Documentation/keys-request-key.txt @@ -127,14 +127,15 @@ This is because process A's keyrings can't simply be attached to of them, and (b) it requires the same UID/GID/Groups all the way through. -====================== -NEGATIVE INSTANTIATION -====================== +==================================== +NEGATIVE INSTANTIATION AND REJECTION +==================================== Rather than instantiating a key, it is possible for the possessor of an authorisation key to negatively instantiate a key that's under construction. This is a short duration placeholder that causes any attempt at re-requesting -the key whilst it exists to fail with error ENOKEY. +the key whilst it exists to fail with error ENOKEY if negated or the specified +error if rejected. This is provided to prevent excessive repeated spawning of /sbin/request-key processes for a key that will never be obtainable. diff --git a/Documentation/keys.txt b/Documentation/keys.txt index e4dbbdb1bd96..6523a9e6f293 100644 --- a/Documentation/keys.txt +++ b/Documentation/keys.txt @@ -637,6 +637,9 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are: long keyctl(KEYCTL_INSTANTIATE, key_serial_t key, const void *payload, size_t plen, key_serial_t keyring); + long keyctl(KEYCTL_INSTANTIATE_IOV, key_serial_t key, + const struct iovec *payload_iov, unsigned ioc, + key_serial_t keyring); If the kernel calls back to userspace to complete the instantiation of a key, userspace should use this call to supply data for the key before the @@ -652,11 +655,16 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are: The payload and plen arguments describe the payload data as for add_key(). + The payload_iov and ioc arguments describe the payload data in an iovec + array instead of a single buffer. + (*) Negatively instantiate a partially constructed key. long keyctl(KEYCTL_NEGATE, key_serial_t key, unsigned timeout, key_serial_t keyring); + long keyctl(KEYCTL_REJECT, key_serial_t key, + unsigned timeout, unsigned error, key_serial_t keyring); If the kernel calls back to userspace to complete the instantiation of a key, userspace should use this call mark the key as negative before the @@ -669,6 +677,10 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are: that keyring, however all the constraints applying in KEYCTL_LINK apply in this case too. + If the key is rejected, future searches for it will return the specified + error code until the rejected key expires. Negating the key is the same + as rejecting the key with ENOKEY as the error code. + (*) Set the default request-key destination keyring. @@ -1062,6 +1074,13 @@ The structure has a number of fields, some of which are mandatory: viable. + (*) int (*vet_description)(const char *description); + + This optional method is called to vet a key description. If the key type + doesn't approve of the key description, it may return an error, otherwise + it should return 0. + + (*) int (*instantiate)(struct key *key, const void *data, size_t datalen); This method is called to attach a payload to a key during construction. @@ -1231,10 +1250,11 @@ hand the request off to (perhaps a path held in placed in another key by, for example, the KDE desktop manager). The program (or whatever it calls) should finish construction of the key by -calling KEYCTL_INSTANTIATE, which also permits it to cache the key in one of -the keyrings (probably the session ring) before returning. Alternatively, the -key can be marked as negative with KEYCTL_NEGATE; this also permits the key to -be cached in one of the keyrings. +calling KEYCTL_INSTANTIATE or KEYCTL_INSTANTIATE_IOV, which also permits it to +cache the key in one of the keyrings (probably the session ring) before +returning. Alternatively, the key can be marked as negative with KEYCTL_NEGATE +or KEYCTL_REJECT; this also permits the key to be cached in one of the +keyrings. If it returns with the key remaining in the unconstructed state, the key will be marked as being negative, it will be added to the session keyring, and an diff --git a/Documentation/kref.txt b/Documentation/kref.txt index ae203f91ee9b..48ba715d5a63 100644 --- a/Documentation/kref.txt +++ b/Documentation/kref.txt @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ static struct my_data *get_entry() struct my_data *entry = NULL; mutex_lock(&mutex); if (!list_empty(&q)) { - entry = container_of(q.next, struct my_q_entry, link); + entry = container_of(q.next, struct my_data, link); kref_get(&entry->refcount); } mutex_unlock(&mutex); diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/api.txt b/Documentation/kvm/api.txt index ad85797c1cf0..9bef4e4cec50 100644 --- a/Documentation/kvm/api.txt +++ b/Documentation/kvm/api.txt @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error This ioctl is obsolete and has been removed. -4.6 KVM_CREATE_VCPU +4.7 KVM_CREATE_VCPU Capability: basic Architectures: all @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Returns: vcpu fd on success, -1 on error This API adds a vcpu to a virtual machine. The vcpu id is a small integer in the range [0, max_vcpus). -4.7 KVM_GET_DIRTY_LOG (vm ioctl) +4.8 KVM_GET_DIRTY_LOG (vm ioctl) Capability: basic Architectures: x86 @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ since the last call to this ioctl. Bit 0 is the first page in the memory slot. Ensure the entire structure is cleared to avoid padding issues. -4.8 KVM_SET_MEMORY_ALIAS +4.9 KVM_SET_MEMORY_ALIAS Capability: basic Architectures: x86 @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ Returns: 0 (success), -1 (error) This ioctl is obsolete and has been removed. -4.9 KVM_RUN +4.10 KVM_RUN Capability: basic Architectures: all @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ obtained by mmap()ing the vcpu fd at offset 0, with the size given by KVM_GET_VCPU_MMAP_SIZE. The parameter block is formatted as a 'struct kvm_run' (see below). -4.10 KVM_GET_REGS +4.11 KVM_GET_REGS Capability: basic Architectures: all @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ struct kvm_regs { __u64 rip, rflags; }; -4.11 KVM_SET_REGS +4.12 KVM_SET_REGS Capability: basic Architectures: all @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Writes the general purpose registers into the vcpu. See KVM_GET_REGS for the data structure. -4.12 KVM_GET_SREGS +4.13 KVM_GET_SREGS Capability: basic Architectures: x86 @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ interrupt_bitmap is a bitmap of pending external interrupts. At most one bit may be set. This interrupt has been acknowledged by the APIC but not yet injected into the cpu core. -4.13 KVM_SET_SREGS +4.14 KVM_SET_SREGS Capability: basic Architectures: x86 @@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error Writes special registers into the vcpu. See KVM_GET_SREGS for the data structures. -4.14 KVM_TRANSLATE +4.15 KVM_TRANSLATE Capability: basic Architectures: x86 @@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ struct kvm_translation { __u8 pad[5]; }; -4.15 KVM_INTERRUPT +4.16 KVM_INTERRUPT Capability: basic Architectures: x86, ppc @@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ c) KVM_INTERRUPT_SET_LEVEL Note that any value for 'irq' other than the ones stated above is invalid and incurs unexpected behavior. -4.16 KVM_DEBUG_GUEST +4.17 KVM_DEBUG_GUEST Capability: basic Architectures: none @@ -375,7 +375,7 @@ Returns: -1 on error Support for this has been removed. Use KVM_SET_GUEST_DEBUG instead. -4.17 KVM_GET_MSRS +4.18 KVM_GET_MSRS Capability: basic Architectures: x86 @@ -403,7 +403,7 @@ Application code should set the 'nmsrs' member (which indicates the size of the entries array) and the 'index' member of each array entry. kvm will fill in the 'data' member. -4.18 KVM_SET_MSRS +4.19 KVM_SET_MSRS Capability: basic Architectures: x86 @@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ Application code should set the 'nmsrs' member (which indicates the size of the entries array), and the 'index' and 'data' members of each array entry. -4.19 KVM_SET_CPUID +4.20 KVM_SET_CPUID Capability: basic Architectures: x86 @@ -446,7 +446,7 @@ struct kvm_cpuid { struct kvm_cpuid_entry entries[0]; }; -4.20 KVM_SET_SIGNAL_MASK +4.21 KVM_SET_SIGNAL_MASK Capability: basic Architectures: x86 @@ -468,7 +468,7 @@ struct kvm_signal_mask { __u8 sigset[0]; }; -4.21 KVM_GET_FPU +4.22 KVM_GET_FPU Capability: basic Architectures: x86 @@ -493,7 +493,7 @@ struct kvm_fpu { __u32 pad2; }; -4.22 KVM_SET_FPU +4.23 KVM_SET_FPU Capability: basic Architectures: x86 @@ -518,7 +518,7 @@ struct kvm_fpu { __u32 pad2; }; -4.23 KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP +4.24 KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQCHIP Architectures: x86, ia64 @@ -531,7 +531,7 @@ ioapic, a virtual PIC (two PICs, nested), and sets up future vcpus to have a local APIC. IRQ routing for GSIs 0-15 is set to both PIC and IOAPIC; GSI 16-23 only go to the IOAPIC. On ia64, a IOSAPIC is created. -4.24 KVM_IRQ_LINE +4.25 KVM_IRQ_LINE Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQCHIP Architectures: x86, ia64 @@ -552,7 +552,7 @@ struct kvm_irq_level { __u32 level; /* 0 or 1 */ }; -4.25 KVM_GET_IRQCHIP +4.26 KVM_GET_IRQCHIP Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQCHIP Architectures: x86, ia64 @@ -573,7 +573,7 @@ struct kvm_irqchip { } chip; }; -4.26 KVM_SET_IRQCHIP +4.27 KVM_SET_IRQCHIP Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQCHIP Architectures: x86, ia64 @@ -594,7 +594,7 @@ struct kvm_irqchip { } chip; }; -4.27 KVM_XEN_HVM_CONFIG +4.28 KVM_XEN_HVM_CONFIG Capability: KVM_CAP_XEN_HVM Architectures: x86 @@ -618,7 +618,7 @@ struct kvm_xen_hvm_config { __u8 pad2[30]; }; -4.27 KVM_GET_CLOCK +4.29 KVM_GET_CLOCK Capability: KVM_CAP_ADJUST_CLOCK Architectures: x86 @@ -636,7 +636,7 @@ struct kvm_clock_data { __u32 pad[9]; }; -4.28 KVM_SET_CLOCK +4.30 KVM_SET_CLOCK Capability: KVM_CAP_ADJUST_CLOCK Architectures: x86 @@ -654,7 +654,7 @@ struct kvm_clock_data { __u32 pad[9]; }; -4.29 KVM_GET_VCPU_EVENTS +4.31 KVM_GET_VCPU_EVENTS Capability: KVM_CAP_VCPU_EVENTS Extended by: KVM_CAP_INTR_SHADOW @@ -693,7 +693,7 @@ struct kvm_vcpu_events { KVM_VCPUEVENT_VALID_SHADOW may be set in the flags field to signal that interrupt.shadow contains a valid state. Otherwise, this field is undefined. -4.30 KVM_SET_VCPU_EVENTS +4.32 KVM_SET_VCPU_EVENTS Capability: KVM_CAP_VCPU_EVENTS Extended by: KVM_CAP_INTR_SHADOW @@ -719,7 +719,7 @@ If KVM_CAP_INTR_SHADOW is available, KVM_VCPUEVENT_VALID_SHADOW can be set in the flags field to signal that interrupt.shadow contains a valid state and shall be written into the VCPU. -4.32 KVM_GET_DEBUGREGS +4.33 KVM_GET_DEBUGREGS Capability: KVM_CAP_DEBUGREGS Architectures: x86 @@ -737,7 +737,7 @@ struct kvm_debugregs { __u64 reserved[9]; }; -4.33 KVM_SET_DEBUGREGS +4.34 KVM_SET_DEBUGREGS Capability: KVM_CAP_DEBUGREGS Architectures: x86 @@ -750,7 +750,7 @@ Writes debug registers into the vcpu. See KVM_GET_DEBUGREGS for the data structure. The flags field is unused yet and must be cleared on entry. -4.34 KVM_SET_USER_MEMORY_REGION +4.35 KVM_SET_USER_MEMORY_REGION Capability: KVM_CAP_USER_MEM Architectures: all @@ -796,7 +796,7 @@ It is recommended to use this API instead of the KVM_SET_MEMORY_REGION ioctl. The KVM_SET_MEMORY_REGION does not allow fine grained control over memory allocation and is deprecated. -4.35 KVM_SET_TSS_ADDR +4.36 KVM_SET_TSS_ADDR Capability: KVM_CAP_SET_TSS_ADDR Architectures: x86 @@ -814,7 +814,7 @@ This ioctl is required on Intel-based hosts. This is needed on Intel hardware because of a quirk in the virtualization implementation (see the internals documentation when it pops into existence). -4.36 KVM_ENABLE_CAP +4.37 KVM_ENABLE_CAP Capability: KVM_CAP_ENABLE_CAP Architectures: ppc @@ -849,7 +849,7 @@ function properly, this is the place to put them. __u8 pad[64]; }; -4.37 KVM_GET_MP_STATE +4.38 KVM_GET_MP_STATE Capability: KVM_CAP_MP_STATE Architectures: x86, ia64 @@ -879,7 +879,7 @@ Possible values are: This ioctl is only useful after KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP. Without an in-kernel irqchip, the multiprocessing state must be maintained by userspace. -4.38 KVM_SET_MP_STATE +4.39 KVM_SET_MP_STATE Capability: KVM_CAP_MP_STATE Architectures: x86, ia64 @@ -893,7 +893,7 @@ arguments. This ioctl is only useful after KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP. Without an in-kernel irqchip, the multiprocessing state must be maintained by userspace. -4.39 KVM_SET_IDENTITY_MAP_ADDR +4.40 KVM_SET_IDENTITY_MAP_ADDR Capability: KVM_CAP_SET_IDENTITY_MAP_ADDR Architectures: x86 @@ -911,7 +911,7 @@ This ioctl is required on Intel-based hosts. This is needed on Intel hardware because of a quirk in the virtualization implementation (see the internals documentation when it pops into existence). -4.40 KVM_SET_BOOT_CPU_ID +4.41 KVM_SET_BOOT_CPU_ID Capability: KVM_CAP_SET_BOOT_CPU_ID Architectures: x86, ia64 @@ -923,7 +923,7 @@ Define which vcpu is the Bootstrap Processor (BSP). Values are the same as the vcpu id in KVM_CREATE_VCPU. If this ioctl is not called, the default is vcpu 0. -4.41 KVM_GET_XSAVE +4.42 KVM_GET_XSAVE Capability: KVM_CAP_XSAVE Architectures: x86 @@ -937,7 +937,7 @@ struct kvm_xsave { This ioctl would copy current vcpu's xsave struct to the userspace. -4.42 KVM_SET_XSAVE +4.43 KVM_SET_XSAVE Capability: KVM_CAP_XSAVE Architectures: x86 @@ -951,7 +951,7 @@ struct kvm_xsave { This ioctl would copy userspace's xsave struct to the kernel. -4.43 KVM_GET_XCRS +4.44 KVM_GET_XCRS Capability: KVM_CAP_XCRS Architectures: x86 @@ -974,7 +974,7 @@ struct kvm_xcrs { This ioctl would copy current vcpu's xcrs to the userspace. -4.44 KVM_SET_XCRS +4.45 KVM_SET_XCRS Capability: KVM_CAP_XCRS Architectures: x86 @@ -997,7 +997,7 @@ struct kvm_xcrs { This ioctl would set vcpu's xcr to the value userspace specified. -4.45 KVM_GET_SUPPORTED_CPUID +4.46 KVM_GET_SUPPORTED_CPUID Capability: KVM_CAP_EXT_CPUID Architectures: x86 @@ -1062,7 +1062,7 @@ emulate them efficiently. The fields in each entry are defined as follows: eax, ebx, ecx, edx: the values returned by the cpuid instruction for this function/index combination -4.46 KVM_PPC_GET_PVINFO +4.47 KVM_PPC_GET_PVINFO Capability: KVM_CAP_PPC_GET_PVINFO Architectures: ppc @@ -1085,7 +1085,7 @@ of 4 instructions that make up a hypercall. If any additional field gets added to this structure later on, a bit for that additional piece of information will be set in the flags bitmap. -4.47 KVM_ASSIGN_PCI_DEVICE +4.48 KVM_ASSIGN_PCI_DEVICE Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_ASSIGNMENT Architectures: x86 ia64 @@ -1113,7 +1113,7 @@ following flags are specified: /* Depends on KVM_CAP_IOMMU */ #define KVM_DEV_ASSIGN_ENABLE_IOMMU (1 << 0) -4.48 KVM_DEASSIGN_PCI_DEVICE +4.49 KVM_DEASSIGN_PCI_DEVICE Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_DEASSIGNMENT Architectures: x86 ia64 @@ -1126,7 +1126,7 @@ Ends PCI device assignment, releasing all associated resources. See KVM_CAP_DEVICE_ASSIGNMENT for the data structure. Only assigned_dev_id is used in kvm_assigned_pci_dev to identify the device. -4.49 KVM_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ +4.50 KVM_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ Capability: KVM_CAP_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ Architectures: x86 ia64 @@ -1164,7 +1164,7 @@ The following flags are defined: It is not valid to specify multiple types per host or guest IRQ. However, the IRQ type of host and guest can differ or can even be null. -4.50 KVM_DEASSIGN_DEV_IRQ +4.51 KVM_DEASSIGN_DEV_IRQ Capability: KVM_CAP_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ Architectures: x86 ia64 @@ -1178,7 +1178,7 @@ See KVM_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ for the data structure. The target device is specified by assigned_dev_id, flags must correspond to the IRQ type specified on KVM_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ. Partial deassignment of host or guest IRQ is allowed. -4.51 KVM_SET_GSI_ROUTING +4.52 KVM_SET_GSI_ROUTING Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQ_ROUTING Architectures: x86 ia64 @@ -1226,7 +1226,7 @@ struct kvm_irq_routing_msi { __u32 pad; }; -4.52 KVM_ASSIGN_SET_MSIX_NR +4.53 KVM_ASSIGN_SET_MSIX_NR Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_MSIX Architectures: x86 ia64 @@ -1245,7 +1245,7 @@ struct kvm_assigned_msix_nr { #define KVM_MAX_MSIX_PER_DEV 256 -4.53 KVM_ASSIGN_SET_MSIX_ENTRY +4.54 KVM_ASSIGN_SET_MSIX_ENTRY Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_MSIX Architectures: x86 ia64 diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/locking.txt b/Documentation/kvm/locking.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..3b4cd3bf5631 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/kvm/locking.txt @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +KVM Lock Overview +================= + +1. Acquisition Orders +--------------------- + +(to be written) + +2. Reference +------------ + +Name: kvm_lock +Type: raw_spinlock +Arch: any +Protects: - vm_list + - hardware virtualization enable/disable +Comment: 'raw' because hardware enabling/disabling must be atomic /wrt + migration. + +Name: kvm_arch::tsc_write_lock +Type: raw_spinlock +Arch: x86 +Protects: - kvm_arch::{last_tsc_write,last_tsc_nsec,last_tsc_offset} + - tsc offset in vmcb +Comment: 'raw' because updating the tsc offsets must not be preempted. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/hpfall.c b/Documentation/laptops/hpfall.c index a4a8fc5d05d4..a4a8fc5d05d4 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/hpfall.c +++ b/Documentation/laptops/hpfall.c diff --git a/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt b/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt index 631ad2f1b229..f0d3a8026a56 100644 --- a/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt +++ b/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt @@ -21,6 +21,7 @@ Contents: - SMP barrier pairing. - Examples of memory barrier sequences. - Read memory barriers vs load speculation. + - Transitivity (*) Explicit kernel barriers. @@ -959,6 +960,63 @@ the speculation will be cancelled and the value reloaded: retrieved : : +-------+ +TRANSITIVITY +------------ + +Transitivity is a deeply intuitive notion about ordering that is not +always provided by real computer systems. The following example +demonstrates transitivity (also called "cumulativity"): + + CPU 1 CPU 2 CPU 3 + ======================= ======================= ======================= + { X = 0, Y = 0 } + STORE X=1 LOAD X STORE Y=1 + <general barrier> <general barrier> + LOAD Y LOAD X + +Suppose that CPU 2's load from X returns 1 and its load from Y returns 0. +This indicates that CPU 2's load from X in some sense follows CPU 1's +store to X and that CPU 2's load from Y in some sense preceded CPU 3's +store to Y. The question is then "Can CPU 3's load from X return 0?" + +Because CPU 2's load from X in some sense came after CPU 1's store, it +is natural to expect that CPU 3's load from X must therefore return 1. +This expectation is an example of transitivity: if a load executing on +CPU A follows a load from the same variable executing on CPU B, then +CPU A's load must either return the same value that CPU B's load did, +or must return some later value. + +In the Linux kernel, use of general memory barriers guarantees +transitivity. Therefore, in the above example, if CPU 2's load from X +returns 1 and its load from Y returns 0, then CPU 3's load from X must +also return 1. + +However, transitivity is -not- guaranteed for read or write barriers. +For example, suppose that CPU 2's general barrier in the above example +is changed to a read barrier as shown below: + + CPU 1 CPU 2 CPU 3 + ======================= ======================= ======================= + { X = 0, Y = 0 } + STORE X=1 LOAD X STORE Y=1 + <read barrier> <general barrier> + LOAD Y LOAD X + +This substitution destroys transitivity: in this example, it is perfectly +legal for CPU 2's load from X to return 1, its load from Y to return 0, +and CPU 3's load from X to return 0. + +The key point is that although CPU 2's read barrier orders its pair +of loads, it does not guarantee to order CPU 1's store. Therefore, if +this example runs on a system where CPUs 1 and 2 share a store buffer +or a level of cache, CPU 2 might have early access to CPU 1's writes. +General barriers are therefore required to ensure that all CPUs agree +on the combined order of CPU 1's and CPU 2's accesses. + +To reiterate, if your code requires transitivity, use general barriers +throughout. + + ======================== EXPLICIT KERNEL BARRIERS ======================== diff --git a/Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt b/Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt index 57e7e9cc1870..8f485d72cf25 100644 --- a/Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt +++ b/Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt @@ -126,36 +126,51 @@ config options. -------------------------------- 4 sysfs files for memory hotplug -------------------------------- -All sections have their device information under /sys/devices/system/memory as +All sections have their device information in sysfs. Each section is part of +a memory block under /sys/devices/system/memory as /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX -(XXX is section id.) +(XXX is the section id.) -Now, XXX is defined as start_address_of_section / section_size. +Now, XXX is defined as (start_address_of_section / section_size) of the first +section contained in the memory block. The files 'phys_index' and +'end_phys_index' under each directory report the beginning and end section id's +for the memory block covered by the sysfs directory. It is expected that all +memory sections in this range are present and no memory holes exist in the +range. Currently there is no way to determine if there is a memory hole, but +the existence of one should not affect the hotplug capabilities of the memory +block. For example, assume 1GiB section size. A device for a memory starting at 0x100000000 is /sys/device/system/memory/memory4 (0x100000000 / 1Gib = 4) This device covers address range [0x100000000 ... 0x140000000) -Under each section, you can see 4 files. +Under each section, you can see 4 or 5 files, the end_phys_index file being +a recent addition and not present on older kernels. -/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/phys_index +/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/start_phys_index +/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/end_phys_index /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/phys_device /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/removable -'phys_index' : read-only and contains section id, same as XXX. -'state' : read-write - at read: contains online/offline state of memory. - at write: user can specify "online", "offline" command -'phys_device': read-only: designed to show the name of physical memory device. - This is not well implemented now. -'removable' : read-only: contains an integer value indicating - whether the memory section is removable or not - removable. A value of 1 indicates that the memory - section is removable and a value of 0 indicates that - it is not removable. +'phys_index' : read-only and contains section id of the first section + in the memory block, same as XXX. +'end_phys_index' : read-only and contains section id of the last section + in the memory block. +'state' : read-write + at read: contains online/offline state of memory. + at write: user can specify "online", "offline" command + which will be performed on al sections in the block. +'phys_device' : read-only: designed to show the name of physical memory + device. This is not well implemented now. +'removable' : read-only: contains an integer value indicating + whether the memory block is removable or not + removable. A value of 1 indicates that the memory + block is removable and a value of 0 indicates that + it is not removable. A memory block is removable only if + every section in the block is removable. NOTE: These directories/files appear after physical memory hotplug phase. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lis3lv02d b/Documentation/misc-devices/lis3lv02d index 06534f25e643..f1a4ec840f86 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lis3lv02d +++ b/Documentation/misc-devices/lis3lv02d @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ Description This driver provides support for the accelerometer found in various HP laptops sporting the feature officially called "HP Mobile Data Protection System 3D" or "HP 3D DriveGuard". It detects automatically laptops with this sensor. Known -models (full list can be found in drivers/hwmon/hp_accel.c) will have their -axis automatically oriented on standard way (eg: you can directly play +models (full list can be found in drivers/platform/x86/hp_accel.c) will have +their axis automatically oriented on standard way (eg: you can directly play neverball). The accelerometer data is readable via /sys/devices/platform/lis3lv02d. Reported values are scaled to mg values (1/1000th of earth gravity). diff --git a/Documentation/misc-devices/spear-pcie-gadget.txt b/Documentation/misc-devices/spear-pcie-gadget.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..02c13ef5e908 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/misc-devices/spear-pcie-gadget.txt @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ +Spear PCIe Gadget Driver: + +Author +============= +Pratyush Anand (pratyush.anand@st.com) + +Location +============ +driver/misc/spear13xx_pcie_gadget.c + +Supported Chip: +=================== +SPEAr1300 +SPEAr1310 + +Menuconfig option: +========================== +Device Drivers + Misc devices + PCIe gadget support for SPEAr13XX platform +purpose +=========== +This driver has several nodes which can be read/written by configfs interface. +Its main purpose is to configure selected dual mode PCIe controller as device +and then program its various registers to configure it as a particular device +type. This driver can be used to show spear's PCIe device capability. + +Description of different nodes: +================================= + +read behavior of nodes: +------------------------------ +link :gives ltssm status. +int_type :type of supported interrupt +no_of_msi :zero if MSI is not enabled by host. A positive value is the + number of MSI vector granted. +vendor_id :returns programmed vendor id (hex) +device_id :returns programmed device id(hex) +bar0_size: :returns size of bar0 in hex. +bar0_address :returns address of bar0 mapped area in hex. +bar0_rw_offset :returns offset of bar0 for which bar0_data will return value. +bar0_data :returns data at bar0_rw_offset. + +write behavior of nodes: +------------------------------ +link :write UP to enable ltsmm DOWN to disable +int_type :write interrupt type to be configured and (int_type could be + INTA, MSI or NO_INT). Select MSI only when you have programmed + no_of_msi node. +no_of_msi :number of MSI vector needed. +inta :write 1 to assert INTA and 0 to de-assert. +send_msi :write MSI vector to be sent. +vendor_id :write vendor id(hex) to be programmed. +device_id :write device id(hex) to be programmed. +bar0_size :write size of bar0 in hex. default bar0 size is 1000 (hex) + bytes. +bar0_address :write address of bar0 mapped area in hex. (default mapping of + bar0 is SYSRAM1(E0800000). Always program bar size before bar + address. Kernel might modify bar size and address for alignment, so + read back bar size and address after writing to cross check. +bar0_rw_offset :write offset of bar0 for which bar0_data will write value. +bar0_data :write data to be written at bar0_rw_offset. + +Node programming example +=========================== +Program all PCIe registers in such a way that when this device is connected +to the PCIe host, then host sees this device as 1MB RAM. +#mount -t configfs none /Config +For nth PCIe Device Controller +# cd /config/pcie_gadget.n/ +Now you have all the nodes in this directory. +program vendor id as 0x104a +# echo 104A >> vendor_id + +program device id as 0xCD80 +# echo CD80 >> device_id + +program BAR0 size as 1MB +# echo 100000 >> bar0_size + +check for programmed bar0 size +# cat bar0_size + +Program BAR0 Address as DDR (0x2100000). This is the physical address of +memory, which is to be made visible to PCIe host. Similarly any other peripheral +can also be made visible to PCIe host. E.g., if you program base address of UART +as BAR0 address then when this device will be connected to a host, it will be +visible as UART. +# echo 2100000 >> bar0_address + +program interrupt type : INTA +# echo INTA >> int_type + +go for link up now. +# echo UP >> link + +It will have to be insured that, once link up is done on gadget, then only host +is initialized and start to search PCIe devices on its port. + +/*wait till link is up*/ +# cat link +wait till it returns UP. + +To assert INTA +# echo 1 >> inta + +To de-assert INTA +# echo 0 >> inta + +if MSI is to be used as interrupt, program no of msi vector needed (say4) +# echo 4 >> no_of_msi + +select MSI as interrupt type +# echo MSI >> int_type + +go for link up now +# echo UP >> link + +wait till link is up +# cat link +An application can repetitively read this node till link is found UP. It can +sleep between two read. + +wait till msi is enabled +# cat no_of_msi +Should return 4 (number of requested MSI vector) + +to send msi vector 2 +# echo 2 >> send_msi +#cd - diff --git a/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX b/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX index fe5c099b8fc8..4edd78dfb362 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX @@ -40,8 +40,6 @@ decnet.txt - info on using the DECnet networking layer in Linux. depca.txt - the Digital DEPCA/EtherWORKS DE1?? and DE2?? LANCE Ethernet driver -dgrs.txt - - the Digi International RightSwitch SE-X Ethernet driver dmfe.txt - info on the Davicom DM9102(A)/DM9132/DM9801 fast ethernet driver. e100.txt @@ -50,8 +48,6 @@ e1000.txt - info on Intel's E1000 line of gigabit ethernet boards eql.txt - serial IP load balancing -ethertap.txt - - the Ethertap user space packet reception and transmission driver ewrk3.txt - the Digital EtherWORKS 3 DE203/4/5 Ethernet driver filter.txt @@ -104,8 +100,6 @@ tuntap.txt - TUN/TAP device driver, allowing user space Rx/Tx of packets. vortex.txt - info on using 3Com Vortex (3c590, 3c592, 3c595, 3c597) Ethernet cards. -wavelan.txt - - AT&T GIS (nee NCR) WaveLAN card: An Ethernet-like radio transceiver x25.txt - general info on X.25 development. x25-iface.txt diff --git a/Documentation/networking/Makefile b/Documentation/networking/Makefile index 5aba7a33aeeb..24c308dd3fd1 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/networking/Makefile @@ -4,6 +4,8 @@ obj- := dummy.o # List of programs to build hostprogs-y := ifenslave +HOSTCFLAGS_ifenslave.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include + # Tell kbuild to always build the programs always := $(hostprogs-y) diff --git a/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt b/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt index 77f0cdd5b0dd..18afcd8afd51 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -[state: 21-11-2010] +[state: 27-01-2011] BATMAN-ADV ---------- @@ -67,15 +67,16 @@ All mesh wide settings can be found in batman's own interface folder: # ls /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/ -# aggregated_ogms bonding fragmentation orig_interval -# vis_mode +# aggregated_ogms gw_bandwidth hop_penalty +# bonding gw_mode orig_interval +# fragmentation gw_sel_class vis_mode There is a special folder for debugging informations: # ls /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/ -# originators socket transtable_global transtable_local -# vis_data +# gateways socket transtable_global vis_data +# originators softif_neigh transtable_local Some of the files contain all sort of status information regard- @@ -230,9 +231,8 @@ CONTACT Please send us comments, experiences, questions, anything :) IRC: #batman on irc.freenode.org -Mailing-list: b.a.t.m.a.n@b.a.t.m.a.n@lists.open-mesh.org - (optional subscription at - https://lists.open-mesh.org/mm/listinfo/b.a.t.m.a.n) +Mailing-list: b.a.t.m.a.n@open-mesh.org (optional subscription + at https://lists.open-mesh.org/mm/listinfo/b.a.t.m.a.n) You can also contact the Authors: diff --git a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt index 25d2f4141d27..b36e741e94db 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt @@ -2558,18 +2558,15 @@ enslaved. 16. Resources and Links ======================= -The latest version of the bonding driver can be found in the latest + The latest version of the bonding driver can be found in the latest version of the linux kernel, found on http://kernel.org -The latest version of this document can be found in either the latest -kernel source (named Documentation/networking/bonding.txt), or on the -bonding sourceforge site: + The latest version of this document can be found in the latest kernel +source (named Documentation/networking/bonding.txt). -http://www.sourceforge.net/projects/bonding - -Discussions regarding the bonding driver take place primarily on the -bonding-devel mailing list, hosted at sourceforge.net. If you have -questions or problems, post them to the list. The list address is: + Discussions regarding the usage of the bonding driver take place on the +bonding-devel mailing list, hosted at sourceforge.net. If you have questions or +problems, post them to the list. The list address is: bonding-devel@lists.sourceforge.net @@ -2578,6 +2575,17 @@ be found at: https://lists.sourceforge.net/lists/listinfo/bonding-devel + Discussions regarding the developpement of the bonding driver take place +on the main Linux network mailing list, hosted at vger.kernel.org. The list +address is: + +netdev@vger.kernel.org + + The administrative interface (to subscribe or unsubscribe) can +be found at: + +http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html#netdev + Donald Becker's Ethernet Drivers and diag programs may be found at : - http://web.archive.org/web/*/http://www.scyld.com/network/ diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dns_resolver.txt b/Documentation/networking/dns_resolver.txt index aefd1e681804..04ca06325b08 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dns_resolver.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dns_resolver.txt @@ -61,7 +61,6 @@ before the more general line given above as the first match is the one taken. create dns_resolver foo:* * /usr/sbin/dns.foo %k - ===== USAGE ===== @@ -104,6 +103,14 @@ implemented in the module can be called after doing: returned also. +=============================== +READING DNS KEYS FROM USERSPACE +=============================== + +Keys of dns_resolver type can be read from userspace using keyctl_read() or +"keyctl read/print/pipe". + + ========= MECHANISM ========= diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt index ac3b4a726a1a..d3d653a5f9b9 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt @@ -280,6 +280,17 @@ tcp_max_orphans - INTEGER more aggressively. Let me to remind again: each orphan eats up to ~64K of unswappable memory. +tcp_max_ssthresh - INTEGER + Limited Slow-Start for TCP with large congestion windows (cwnd) defined in + RFC3742. Limited slow-start is a mechanism to limit growth of the cwnd + on the region where cwnd is larger than tcp_max_ssthresh. TCP increases cwnd + by at most tcp_max_ssthresh segments, and by at least tcp_max_ssthresh/2 + segments per RTT when the cwnd is above tcp_max_ssthresh. + If TCP connection increased cwnd to thousands (or tens of thousands) segments, + and thousands of packets were being dropped during slow-start, you can set + tcp_max_ssthresh to improve performance for new TCP connection. + Default: 0 (off) + tcp_max_syn_backlog - INTEGER Maximal number of remembered connection requests, which are still did not receive an acknowledgment from connecting client. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt b/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt index 24ad2adba6e5..81003581f47a 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt @@ -154,9 +154,28 @@ connections, one per accept()'d socket. write(cfd, msg, msglen); } -Connections are established between two endpoints by a "third party" -application. This means that both endpoints are passive; so connect() -is not possible. +Connections are traditionally established between two endpoints by a +"third party" application. This means that both endpoints are passive. + + +As of Linux kernel version 2.6.39, it is also possible to connect +two endpoints directly, using connect() on the active side. This is +intended to support the newer Nokia Wireless Modem API, as found in +e.g. the Nokia Slim Modem in the ST-Ericsson U8500 platform: + + struct sockaddr_spn spn; + int fd; + + fd = socket(PF_PHONET, SOCK_SEQPACKET, PN_PROTO_PIPE); + memset(&spn, 0, sizeof(spn)); + spn.spn_family = AF_PHONET; + spn.spn_obj = ...; + spn.spn_dev = ...; + spn.spn_resource = 0xD9; + connect(fd, (struct sockaddr *)&spn, sizeof(spn)); + /* normal I/O here ... */ + close(fd); + WARNING: When polling a connected pipe socket for writability, there is an @@ -181,45 +200,9 @@ The pipe protocol provides two socket options at the SOL_PNPIPE level: interface index of the network interface created by PNPIPE_ENCAP, or zero if encapsulation is off. - -Phonet Pipe-controller Implementation -------------------------------------- - -Phonet Pipe-controller is enabled by selecting the CONFIG_PHONET_PIPECTRLR Kconfig -option. It is useful when communicating with those Nokia Modems which do not -implement Pipe controller in them e.g. Nokia Slim Modem used in ST-Ericsson -U8500 platform. - -The implementation is based on the Data Connection Establishment Sequence -depicted in 'Nokia Wireless Modem API - Wireless_modem_user_guide.pdf' -document. - -It allows a phonet sequenced socket (host-pep) to initiate a Pipe connection -between itself and a remote pipe-end point (e.g. modem). - -The implementation adds socket options at SOL_PNPIPE level: - - PNPIPE_PIPE_HANDLE - It accepts an integer argument for setting value of pipe handle. - - PNPIPE_ENABLE accepts one integer value (int). If set to zero, the pipe - is disabled. If the value is non-zero, the pipe is enabled. If the pipe - is not (yet) connected, ENOTCONN is error is returned. - -The implementation also adds socket 'connect'. On calling the 'connect', pipe -will be created between the source socket and the destination, and the pipe -state will be set to PIPE_DISABLED. - -After a pipe has been created and enabled successfully, the Pipe data can be -exchanged between the host-pep and remote-pep (modem). - -User-space would typically follow below sequence with Pipe controller:- --socket --bind --setsockopt for PNPIPE_PIPE_HANDLE --connect --setsockopt for PNPIPE_ENCAP_IP --setsockopt for PNPIPE_ENABLE + PNPIPE_HANDLE is a read-only integer value. It contains the underlying + identifier ("pipe handle") of the pipe. This is only defined for + socket descriptors that are already connected or being connected. Authors diff --git a/Documentation/power/devices.txt b/Documentation/power/devices.txt index 57080cd74575..f023ba6bba62 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/devices.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/devices.txt @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Device Power Management -Copyright (c) 2010 Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>, Novell Inc. +Copyright (c) 2010-2011 Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>, Novell Inc. Copyright (c) 2010 Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu> @@ -159,18 +159,18 @@ matter, and the kernel is responsible for keeping track of it. By contrast, whether or not a wakeup-capable device should issue wakeup events is a policy decision, and it is managed by user space through a sysfs attribute: the power/wakeup file. User space can write the strings "enabled" or "disabled" to -set or clear the should_wakeup flag, respectively. Reads from the file will -return the corresponding string if can_wakeup is true, but if can_wakeup is -false then reads will return an empty string, to indicate that the device -doesn't support wakeup events. (But even though the file appears empty, writes -will still affect the should_wakeup flag.) +set or clear the "should_wakeup" flag, respectively. This file is only present +for wakeup-capable devices (i.e. devices whose "can_wakeup" flags are set) +and is created (or removed) by device_set_wakeup_capable(). Reads from the +file will return the corresponding string. The device_may_wakeup() routine returns true only if both flags are set. -Drivers should check this routine when putting devices in a low-power state -during a system sleep transition, to see whether or not to enable the devices' -wakeup mechanisms. However for runtime power management, wakeup events should -be enabled whenever the device and driver both support them, regardless of the -should_wakeup flag. +This information is used by subsystems, like the PCI bus type code, to see +whether or not to enable the devices' wakeup mechanisms. If device wakeup +mechanisms are enabled or disabled directly by drivers, they also should use +device_may_wakeup() to decide what to do during a system sleep transition. +However for runtime power management, wakeup events should be enabled whenever +the device and driver both support them, regardless of the should_wakeup flag. /sys/devices/.../power/control files @@ -249,23 +249,18 @@ various phases always run after tasks have been frozen and before they are unfrozen. Furthermore, the *_noirq phases run at a time when IRQ handlers have been disabled (except for those marked with the IRQ_WAKEUP flag). -Most phases use bus, type, and class callbacks (that is, methods defined in -dev->bus->pm, dev->type->pm, and dev->class->pm). The prepare and complete -phases are exceptions; they use only bus callbacks. When multiple callbacks -are used in a phase, they are invoked in the order: <class, type, bus> during -power-down transitions and in the opposite order during power-up transitions. -For example, during the suspend phase the PM core invokes - - dev->class->pm.suspend(dev); - dev->type->pm.suspend(dev); - dev->bus->pm.suspend(dev); - -before moving on to the next device, whereas during the resume phase the core -invokes - - dev->bus->pm.resume(dev); - dev->type->pm.resume(dev); - dev->class->pm.resume(dev); +All phases use bus, type, or class callbacks (that is, methods defined in +dev->bus->pm, dev->type->pm, or dev->class->pm). These callbacks are mutually +exclusive, so if the device type provides a struct dev_pm_ops object pointed to +by its pm field (i.e. both dev->type and dev->type->pm are defined), the +callbacks included in that object (i.e. dev->type->pm) will be used. Otherwise, +if the class provides a struct dev_pm_ops object pointed to by its pm field +(i.e. both dev->class and dev->class->pm are defined), the PM core will use the +callbacks from that object (i.e. dev->class->pm). Finally, if the pm fields of +both the device type and class objects are NULL (or those objects do not exist), +the callbacks provided by the bus (that is, the callbacks from dev->bus->pm) +will be used (this allows device types to override callbacks provided by bus +types or classes if necessary). These callbacks may in turn invoke device- or driver-specific methods stored in dev->driver->pm, but they don't have to. @@ -507,6 +502,49 @@ routines. Nevertheless, different callback pointers are used in case there is a situation where it actually matters. +Device Power Domains +-------------------- +Sometimes devices share reference clocks or other power resources. In those +cases it generally is not possible to put devices into low-power states +individually. Instead, a set of devices sharing a power resource can be put +into a low-power state together at the same time by turning off the shared +power resource. Of course, they also need to be put into the full-power state +together, by turning the shared power resource on. A set of devices with this +property is often referred to as a power domain. + +Support for power domains is provided through the pwr_domain field of struct +device. This field is a pointer to an object of type struct dev_power_domain, +defined in include/linux/pm.h, providing a set of power management callbacks +analogous to the subsystem-level and device driver callbacks that are executed +for the given device during all power transitions, in addition to the respective +subsystem-level callbacks. Specifically, the power domain "suspend" callbacks +(i.e. ->runtime_suspend(), ->suspend(), ->freeze(), ->poweroff(), etc.) are +executed after the analogous subsystem-level callbacks, while the power domain +"resume" callbacks (i.e. ->runtime_resume(), ->resume(), ->thaw(), ->restore, +etc.) are executed before the analogous subsystem-level callbacks. Error codes +returned by the "suspend" and "resume" power domain callbacks are ignored. + +Power domain ->runtime_idle() callback is executed before the subsystem-level +->runtime_idle() callback and the result returned by it is not ignored. Namely, +if it returns error code, the subsystem-level ->runtime_idle() callback will not +be called and the helper function rpm_idle() executing it will return error +code. This mechanism is intended to help platforms where saving device state +is a time consuming operation and should only be carried out if all devices +in the power domain are idle, before turning off the shared power resource(s). +Namely, the power domain ->runtime_idle() callback may return error code until +the pm_runtime_idle() helper (or its asychronous version) has been called for +all devices in the power domain (it is recommended that the returned error code +be -EBUSY in those cases), preventing the subsystem-level ->runtime_idle() +callback from being run prematurely. + +The support for device power domains is only relevant to platforms needing to +use the same subsystem-level (e.g. platform bus type) and device driver power +management callbacks in many different power domain configurations and wanting +to avoid incorporating the support for power domains into the subsystem-level +callbacks. The other platforms need not implement it or take it into account +in any way. + + System Devices -------------- System devices (sysdevs) follow a slightly different API, which can be found in diff --git a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt index ffe55ffa540a..654097b130b4 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Run-time Power Management Framework for I/O Devices -(C) 2009 Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>, Novell Inc. +(C) 2009-2011 Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>, Novell Inc. (C) 2010 Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu> 1. Introduction @@ -44,11 +44,12 @@ struct dev_pm_ops { }; The ->runtime_suspend(), ->runtime_resume() and ->runtime_idle() callbacks are -executed by the PM core for either the bus type, or device type (if the bus -type's callback is not defined), or device class (if the bus type's and device -type's callbacks are not defined) of given device. The bus type, device type -and device class callbacks are referred to as subsystem-level callbacks in what -follows. +executed by the PM core for either the device type, or the class (if the device +type's struct dev_pm_ops object does not exist), or the bus type (if the +device type's and class' struct dev_pm_ops objects do not exist) of the given +device (this allows device types to override callbacks provided by bus types or +classes if necessary). The bus type, device type and class callbacks are +referred to as subsystem-level callbacks in what follows. By default, the callbacks are always invoked in process context with interrupts enabled. However, subsystems can use the pm_runtime_irq_safe() helper function diff --git a/Documentation/power/states.txt b/Documentation/power/states.txt index 34800cc521bf..4416b28630df 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/states.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/states.txt @@ -62,12 +62,12 @@ setup via another operating system for it to use. Despite the inconvenience, this method requires minimal work by the kernel, since the firmware will also handle restoring memory contents on resume. -For suspend-to-disk, a mechanism called swsusp called 'swsusp' (Swap -Suspend) is used to write memory contents to free swap space. -swsusp has some restrictive requirements, but should work in most -cases. Some, albeit outdated, documentation can be found in -Documentation/power/swsusp.txt. Alternatively, userspace can do most -of the actual suspend to disk work, see userland-swsusp.txt. +For suspend-to-disk, a mechanism called 'swsusp' (Swap Suspend) is used +to write memory contents to free swap space. swsusp has some restrictive +requirements, but should work in most cases. Some, albeit outdated, +documentation can be found in Documentation/power/swsusp.txt. +Alternatively, userspace can do most of the actual suspend to disk work, +see userland-swsusp.txt. Once memory state is written to disk, the system may either enter a low-power state (like ACPI S4), or it may simply power down. Powering diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX b/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX index e3960b8c8689..5620fb5ac425 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX @@ -5,8 +5,6 @@ please mail me. 00-INDEX - this file -booting-without-of.txt - - Booting the Linux/ppc kernel without Open Firmware cpu_features.txt - info on how we support a variety of CPUs with minimal compile-time options. @@ -16,8 +14,6 @@ hvcs.txt - IBM "Hypervisor Virtual Console Server" Installation Guide mpc52xx.txt - Linux 2.6.x on MPC52xx family -mpc52xx-device-tree-bindings.txt - - MPC5200 Device Tree Bindings sound.txt - info on sound support under Linux/PPC zImage_layout.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mpic.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mpic.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 71e39cf3215b..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mpic.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ -* OpenPIC and its interrupt numbers on Freescale's e500/e600 cores - -The OpenPIC specification does not specify which interrupt source has to -become which interrupt number. This is up to the software implementation -of the interrupt controller. The only requirement is that every -interrupt source has to have an unique interrupt number / vector number. -To accomplish this the current implementation assigns the number zero to -the first source, the number one to the second source and so on until -all interrupt sources have their unique number. -Usually the assigned vector number equals the interrupt number mentioned -in the documentation for a given core / CPU. This is however not true -for the e500 cores (MPC85XX CPUs) where the documentation distinguishes -between internal and external interrupt sources and starts counting at -zero for both of them. - -So what to write for external interrupt source X or internal interrupt -source Y into the device tree? Here is an example: - -The memory map for the interrupt controller in the MPC8544[0] shows, -that the first interrupt source starts at 0x5_0000 (PIC Register Address -Map-Interrupt Source Configuration Registers). This source becomes the -number zero therefore: - External interrupt 0 = interrupt number 0 - External interrupt 1 = interrupt number 1 - External interrupt 2 = interrupt number 2 - ... -Every interrupt number allocates 0x20 bytes register space. So to get -its number it is sufficient to shift the lower 16bits to right by five. -So for the external interrupt 10 we have: - 0x0140 >> 5 = 10 - -After the external sources, the internal sources follow. The in core I2C -controller on the MPC8544 for instance has the internal source number -27. Oo obtain its interrupt number we take the lower 16bits of its memory -address (0x5_0560) and shift it right: - 0x0560 >> 5 = 43 - -Therefore the I2C device node for the MPC8544 CPU has to have the -interrupt number 43 specified in the device tree. - -[0] MPC8544E PowerQUICCTM III, Integrated Host Processor Family Reference Manual - MPC8544ERM Rev. 1 10/2007 diff --git a/Documentation/rapidio/rapidio.txt b/Documentation/rapidio/rapidio.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..be70ee15f8ca --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/rapidio/rapidio.txt @@ -0,0 +1,173 @@ + The Linux RapidIO Subsystem + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +The RapidIO standard is a packet-based fabric interconnect standard designed for +use in embedded systems. Development of the RapidIO standard is directed by the +RapidIO Trade Association (RTA). The current version of the RapidIO specification +is publicly available for download from the RTA web-site [1]. + +This document describes the basics of the Linux RapidIO subsystem and provides +information on its major components. + +1 Overview +---------- + +Because the RapidIO subsystem follows the Linux device model it is integrated +into the kernel similarly to other buses by defining RapidIO-specific device and +bus types and registering them within the device model. + +The Linux RapidIO subsystem is architecture independent and therefore defines +architecture-specific interfaces that provide support for common RapidIO +subsystem operations. + +2. Core Components +------------------ + +A typical RapidIO network is a combination of endpoints and switches. +Each of these components is represented in the subsystem by an associated data +structure. The core logical components of the RapidIO subsystem are defined +in include/linux/rio.h file. + +2.1 Master Port + +A master port (or mport) is a RapidIO interface controller that is local to the +processor executing the Linux code. A master port generates and receives RapidIO +packets (transactions). In the RapidIO subsystem each master port is represented +by a rio_mport data structure. This structure contains master port specific +resources such as mailboxes and doorbells. The rio_mport also includes a unique +host device ID that is valid when a master port is configured as an enumerating +host. + +RapidIO master ports are serviced by subsystem specific mport device drivers +that provide functionality defined for this subsystem. To provide a hardware +independent interface for RapidIO subsystem operations, rio_mport structure +includes rio_ops data structure which contains pointers to hardware specific +implementations of RapidIO functions. + +2.2 Device + +A RapidIO device is any endpoint (other than mport) or switch in the network. +All devices are presented in the RapidIO subsystem by corresponding rio_dev data +structure. Devices form one global device list and per-network device lists +(depending on number of available mports and networks). + +2.3 Switch + +A RapidIO switch is a special class of device that routes packets between its +ports towards their final destination. The packet destination port within a +switch is defined by an internal routing table. A switch is presented in the +RapidIO subsystem by rio_dev data structure expanded by additional rio_switch +data structure, which contains switch specific information such as copy of the +routing table and pointers to switch specific functions. + +The RapidIO subsystem defines the format and initialization method for subsystem +specific switch drivers that are designed to provide hardware-specific +implementation of common switch management routines. + +2.4 Network + +A RapidIO network is a combination of interconnected endpoint and switch devices. +Each RapidIO network known to the system is represented by corresponding rio_net +data structure. This structure includes lists of all devices and local master +ports that form the same network. It also contains a pointer to the default +master port that is used to communicate with devices within the network. + +3. Subsystem Initialization +--------------------------- + +In order to initialize the RapidIO subsystem, a platform must initialize and +register at least one master port within the RapidIO network. To register mport +within the subsystem controller driver initialization code calls function +rio_register_mport() for each available master port. After all active master +ports are registered with a RapidIO subsystem, the rio_init_mports() routine +is called to perform enumeration and discovery. + +In the current PowerPC-based implementation a subsys_initcall() is specified to +perform controller initialization and mport registration. At the end it directly +calls rio_init_mports() to execute RapidIO enumeration and discovery. + +4. Enumeration and Discovery +---------------------------- + +When rio_init_mports() is called it scans a list of registered master ports and +calls an enumeration or discovery routine depending on the configured role of a +master port: host or agent. + +Enumeration is performed by a master port if it is configured as a host port by +assigning a host device ID greater than or equal to zero. A host device ID is +assigned to a master port through the kernel command line parameter "riohdid=", +or can be configured in a platform-specific manner. If the host device ID for +a specific master port is set to -1, the discovery process will be performed +for it. + +The enumeration and discovery routines use RapidIO maintenance transactions +to access the configuration space of devices. + +The enumeration process is implemented according to the enumeration algorithm +outlined in the RapidIO Interconnect Specification: Annex I [1]. + +The enumeration process traverses the network using a recursive depth-first +algorithm. When a new device is found, the enumerator takes ownership of that +device by writing into the Host Device ID Lock CSR. It does this to ensure that +the enumerator has exclusive right to enumerate the device. If device ownership +is successfully acquired, the enumerator allocates a new rio_dev structure and +initializes it according to device capabilities. + +If the device is an endpoint, a unique device ID is assigned to it and its value +is written into the device's Base Device ID CSR. + +If the device is a switch, the enumerator allocates an additional rio_switch +structure to store switch specific information. Then the switch's vendor ID and +device ID are queried against a table of known RapidIO switches. Each switch +table entry contains a pointer to a switch-specific initialization routine that +initializes pointers to the rest of switch specific operations, and performs +hardware initialization if necessary. A RapidIO switch does not have a unique +device ID; it relies on hopcount and routing for device ID of an attached +endpoint if access to its configuration registers is required. If a switch (or +chain of switches) does not have any endpoint (except enumerator) attached to +it, a fake device ID will be assigned to configure a route to that switch. +In the case of a chain of switches without endpoint, one fake device ID is used +to configure a route through the entire chain and switches are differentiated by +their hopcount value. + +For both endpoints and switches the enumerator writes a unique component tag +into device's Component Tag CSR. That unique value is used by the error +management notification mechanism to identify a device that is reporting an +error management event. + +Enumeration beyond a switch is completed by iterating over each active egress +port of that switch. For each active link, a route to a default device ID +(0xFF for 8-bit systems and 0xFFFF for 16-bit systems) is temporarily written +into the routing table. The algorithm recurs by calling itself with hopcount + 1 +and the default device ID in order to access the device on the active port. + +After the host has completed enumeration of the entire network it releases +devices by clearing device ID locks (calls rio_clear_locks()). For each endpoint +in the system, it sets the Master Enable bit in the Port General Control CSR +to indicate that enumeration is completed and agents are allowed to execute +passive discovery of the network. + +The discovery process is performed by agents and is similar to the enumeration +process that is described above. However, the discovery process is performed +without changes to the existing routing because agents only gather information +about RapidIO network structure and are building an internal map of discovered +devices. This way each Linux-based component of the RapidIO subsystem has +a complete view of the network. The discovery process can be performed +simultaneously by several agents. After initializing its RapidIO master port +each agent waits for enumeration completion by the host for the configured wait +time period. If this wait time period expires before enumeration is completed, +an agent skips RapidIO discovery and continues with remaining kernel +initialization. + +5. References +------------- + +[1] RapidIO Trade Association. RapidIO Interconnect Specifications. + http://www.rapidio.org. +[2] Rapidio TA. Technology Comparisons. + http://www.rapidio.org/education/technology_comparisons/ +[3] RapidIO support for Linux. + http://lwn.net/Articles/139118/ +[4] Matt Porter. RapidIO for Linux. Ottawa Linux Symposium, 2005 + http://www.kernel.org/doc/ols/2005/ols2005v2-pages-43-56.pdf diff --git a/Documentation/rapidio/sysfs.txt b/Documentation/rapidio/sysfs.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..97f71ce575d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/rapidio/sysfs.txt @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + RapidIO sysfs Files + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +1. Device Subdirectories +------------------------ + +For each RapidIO device, the RapidIO subsystem creates files in an individual +subdirectory with the following name, /sys/bus/rapidio/devices/<device_name>. + +The format of device_name is "nn:d:iiii", where: + +nn - two-digit hexadecimal ID of RapidIO network where the device resides +d - device typr: 'e' - for endpoint or 's' - for switch +iiii - four-digit device destID for endpoints, or switchID for switches + +For example, below is a list of device directories that represents a typical +RapidIO network with one switch, one host, and two agent endpoints, as it is +seen by the enumerating host (destID = 1): + +/sys/bus/rapidio/devices/00:e:0000 +/sys/bus/rapidio/devices/00:e:0002 +/sys/bus/rapidio/devices/00:s:0001 + +NOTE: An enumerating or discovering endpoint does not create a sysfs entry for +itself, this is why an endpoint with destID=1 is not shown in the list. + +2. Attributes Common for All Devices +------------------------------------ + +Each device subdirectory contains the following informational read-only files: + + did - returns the device identifier + vid - returns the device vendor identifier +device_rev - returns the device revision level + asm_did - returns identifier for the assembly containing the device + asm_rev - returns revision level of the assembly containing the device + asm_vid - returns vendor identifier of the assembly containing the device + destid - returns device destination ID assigned by the enumeration routine + (see 4.1 for switch specific details) + lprev - returns name of previous device (switch) on the path to the device + that that owns this attribute + +In addition to the files listed above, each device has a binary attribute file +that allows read/write access to the device configuration registers using +the RapidIO maintenance transactions: + + config - reads from and writes to the device configuration registers. + +This attribute is similar in behavior to the "config" attribute of PCI devices +and provides an access to the RapidIO device registers using standard file read +and write operations. + +3. Endpoint Device Attributes +----------------------------- + +Currently Linux RapidIO subsystem does not create any endpoint specific sysfs +attributes. It is possible that RapidIO master port drivers and endpoint device +drivers will add their device-specific sysfs attributes but such attributes are +outside the scope of this document. + +4. Switch Device Attributes +--------------------------- + +RapidIO switches have additional attributes in sysfs. RapidIO subsystem supports +common and device-specific sysfs attributes for switches. Because switches are +integrated into the RapidIO subsystem, it offers a method to create +device-specific sysfs attributes by specifying a callback function that may be +set by the switch initialization routine during enumeration or discovery process. + +4.1 Common Switch Attributes + + routes - reports switch routing information in "destID port" format. This + attribute reports only valid routing table entries, one line for + each entry. + destid - device destination ID that defines a route to the switch + hopcount - number of hops on the path to the switch + lnext - returns names of devices linked to the switch except one of a device + linked to the ingress port (reported as "lprev"). This is an array + names with number of lines equal to number of ports in switch. If + a switch port has no attached device, returns "null" instead of + a device name. + +4.2 Device-specific Switch Attributes + +Device-specific switch attributes are listed for each RapidIO switch driver +that exports additional attributes. + +IDT_GEN2: + errlog - reads contents of device error log until it is empty. diff --git a/Documentation/rtc.txt b/Documentation/rtc.txt index 9104c1062084..250160469d83 100644 --- a/Documentation/rtc.txt +++ b/Documentation/rtc.txt @@ -178,38 +178,29 @@ RTC class framework, but can't be supported by the older driver. setting the longer alarm time and enabling its IRQ using a single request (using the same model as EFI firmware). - * RTC_UIE_ON, RTC_UIE_OFF ... if the RTC offers IRQs, it probably - also offers update IRQs whenever the "seconds" counter changes. - If needed, the RTC framework can emulate this mechanism. + * RTC_UIE_ON, RTC_UIE_OFF ... if the RTC offers IRQs, the RTC framework + will emulate this mechanism. - * RTC_PIE_ON, RTC_PIE_OFF, RTC_IRQP_SET, RTC_IRQP_READ ... another - feature often accessible with an IRQ line is a periodic IRQ, issued - at settable frequencies (usually 2^N Hz). + * RTC_PIE_ON, RTC_PIE_OFF, RTC_IRQP_SET, RTC_IRQP_READ ... these icotls + are emulated via a kernel hrtimer. In many cases, the RTC alarm can be a system wake event, used to force Linux out of a low power sleep state (or hibernation) back to a fully operational state. For example, a system could enter a deep power saving state until it's time to execute some scheduled tasks. -Note that many of these ioctls need not actually be implemented by your -driver. The common rtc-dev interface handles many of these nicely if your -driver returns ENOIOCTLCMD. Some common examples: +Note that many of these ioctls are handled by the common rtc-dev interface. +Some common examples: * RTC_RD_TIME, RTC_SET_TIME: the read_time/set_time functions will be called with appropriate values. - * RTC_ALM_SET, RTC_ALM_READ, RTC_WKALM_SET, RTC_WKALM_RD: the - set_alarm/read_alarm functions will be called. + * RTC_ALM_SET, RTC_ALM_READ, RTC_WKALM_SET, RTC_WKALM_RD: gets or sets + the alarm rtc_timer. May call the set_alarm driver function. - * RTC_IRQP_SET, RTC_IRQP_READ: the irq_set_freq function will be called - to set the frequency while the framework will handle the read for you - since the frequency is stored in the irq_freq member of the rtc_device - structure. Your driver needs to initialize the irq_freq member during - init. Make sure you check the requested frequency is in range of your - hardware in the irq_set_freq function. If it isn't, return -EINVAL. If - you cannot actually change the frequency, do not define irq_set_freq. + * RTC_IRQP_SET, RTC_IRQP_READ: These are emulated by the generic code. - * RTC_PIE_ON, RTC_PIE_OFF: the irq_set_state function will be called. + * RTC_PIE_ON, RTC_PIE_OFF: These are also emulated by the generic code. If all else fails, check out the rtc-test.c driver! diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas index b64d10d221ec..4d9ce73ff730 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas @@ -1,3 +1,26 @@ +Release Date : Thu. Feb 24, 2011 17:00:00 PST 2010 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Adam Radford +Current Version : 00.00.05.34-rc1 +Old Version : 00.00.05.29-rc1 + 1. Fix some failure gotos from megasas_probe_one(), etc. + 2. Add missing check_and_restore_queue_depth() call in + complete_cmd_fusion(). + 3. Enable MSI-X before calling megasas_init_fw(). + 4. Call tasklet_schedule() even if outbound_intr_status == 0 for MFI based + boards in MSI-X mode. + 5. Fix megasas_probe_one() to clear PCI_MSIX_FLAGS_ENABLE in msi control + register in kdump kernel. + 6. Fix megasas_get_cmd() to only print "Command pool empty" if + megasas_dbg_lvl is set. + 7. Fix megasas_build_dcdb_fusion() to not filter by TYPE_DISK. + 8. Fix megasas_build_dcdb_fusion() to use io_request->LUN[1] field. + 9. Add MR_EVT_CFG_CLEARED to megasas_aen_polling(). + 10. Fix tasklet_init() in megasas_init_fw() to use instancet->tasklet. + 11. Fix fault state handling in megasas_transition_to_ready(). + 12. Fix max_sectors setting for IEEE SGL's. + 13. Fix iMR OCR support to work correctly. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Release Date : Tues. Dec 14, 2010 17:00:00 PST 2010 - (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) Adam Radford diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/hpsa.txt b/Documentation/scsi/hpsa.txt index dca658362cbf..891435a72fce 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/hpsa.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/hpsa.txt @@ -28,6 +28,12 @@ boot parameter "hpsa_allow_any=1" is specified, however these are not tested nor supported by HP with this driver. For older Smart Arrays, the cciss driver should still be used. +The "hpsa_simple_mode=1" boot parameter may be used to prevent the driver from +putting the controller into "performant" mode. The difference is that with simple +mode, each command completion requires an interrupt, while with "performant mode" +(the default, and ordinarily better performing) it is possible to have multiple +command completions indicated by a single interrupt. + HPSA specific entries in /sys ----------------------------- @@ -39,6 +45,8 @@ HPSA specific entries in /sys /sys/class/scsi_host/host*/rescan /sys/class/scsi_host/host*/firmware_revision + /sys/class/scsi_host/host*/resettable + /sys/class/scsi_host/host*/transport_mode the host "rescan" attribute is a write only attribute. Writing to this attribute will cause the driver to scan for new, changed, or removed devices @@ -55,6 +63,21 @@ HPSA specific entries in /sys root@host:/sys/class/scsi_host/host4# cat firmware_revision 7.14 + The transport_mode indicates whether the controller is in "performant" + or "simple" mode. This is controlled by the "hpsa_simple_mode" module + parameter. + + The "resettable" read-only attribute indicates whether a particular + controller is able to honor the "reset_devices" kernel parameter. If the + device is resettable, this file will contain a "1", otherwise, a "0". This + parameter is used by kdump, for example, to reset the controller at driver + load time to eliminate any outstanding commands on the controller and get the + controller into a known state so that the kdump initiated i/o will work right + and not be disrupted in any way by stale commands or other stale state + remaining on the controller from the previous kernel. This attribute enables + kexec tools to warn the user if they attempt to designate a device which is + unable to honor the reset_devices kernel parameter as a dump device. + HPSA specific disk attributes: ------------------------------ diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt index df322c103466..5f17d29c59b5 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt @@ -1343,7 +1343,7 @@ Members of interest: underruns (overruns should be rare). If possible an LLD should set 'resid' prior to invoking 'done'. The most interesting case is data transfers from a SCSI target - device device (i.e. READs) that underrun. + device (e.g. READs) that underrun. underflow - LLD should place (DID_ERROR << 16) in 'result' if actual number of bytes transferred is less than this figure. Not many LLDs implement this check and some that @@ -1351,6 +1351,18 @@ Members of interest: report a DID_ERROR. Better for an LLD to implement 'resid'. +It is recommended that a LLD set 'resid' on data transfers from a SCSI +target device (e.g. READs). It is especially important that 'resid' is set +when such data transfers have sense keys of MEDIUM ERROR and HARDWARE ERROR +(and possibly RECOVERED ERROR). In these cases if a LLD is in doubt how much +data has been received then the safest approach is to indicate no bytes have +been received. For example: to indicate that no valid data has been received +a LLD might use these helpers: + scsi_set_resid(SCpnt, scsi_bufflen(SCpnt)); +where 'SCpnt' is a pointer to a scsi_cmnd object. To indicate only three 512 +bytes blocks has been received 'resid' could be set like this: + scsi_set_resid(SCpnt, scsi_bufflen(SCpnt) - (3 * 512)); + The scsi_cmnd structure is defined in include/scsi/scsi_cmnd.h diff --git a/Documentation/serial/n_gsm.txt b/Documentation/serial/n_gsm.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..397f41a1f153 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/serial/n_gsm.txt @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ +n_gsm.c GSM 0710 tty multiplexor HOWTO +=================================================== + +This line discipline implements the GSM 07.10 multiplexing protocol +detailed in the following 3GPP document : +http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/07_series/07.10/0710-720.zip + +This document give some hints on how to use this driver with GPRS and 3G +modems connected to a physical serial port. + +How to use it +------------- +1- initialize the modem in 0710 mux mode (usually AT+CMUX= command) through +its serial port. Depending on the modem used, you can pass more or less +parameters to this command, +2- switch the serial line to using the n_gsm line discipline by using +TIOCSETD ioctl, +3- configure the mux using GSMIOC_GETCONF / GSMIOC_SETCONF ioctl, + +Major parts of the initialization program : +(a good starting point is util-linux-ng/sys-utils/ldattach.c) +#include <linux/gsmmux.h> +#define N_GSM0710 21 /* GSM 0710 Mux */ +#define DEFAULT_SPEED B115200 +#define SERIAL_PORT /dev/ttyS0 + + int ldisc = N_GSM0710; + struct gsm_config c; + struct termios configuration; + + /* open the serial port connected to the modem */ + fd = open(SERIAL_PORT, O_RDWR | O_NOCTTY | O_NDELAY); + + /* configure the serial port : speed, flow control ... */ + + /* send the AT commands to switch the modem to CMUX mode + and check that it's succesful (should return OK) */ + write(fd, "AT+CMUX=0\r", 10); + + /* experience showed that some modems need some time before + being able to answer to the first MUX packet so a delay + may be needed here in some case */ + sleep(3); + + /* use n_gsm line discipline */ + ioctl(fd, TIOCSETD, &ldisc); + + /* get n_gsm configuration */ + ioctl(fd, GSMIOC_GETCONF, &c); + /* we are initiator and need encoding 0 (basic) */ + c.initiator = 1; + c.encapsulation = 0; + /* our modem defaults to a maximum size of 127 bytes */ + c.mru = 127; + c.mtu = 127; + /* set the new configuration */ + ioctl(fd, GSMIOC_SETCONF, &c); + + /* and wait for ever to keep the line discipline enabled */ + daemon(0,0); + pause(); + +4- create the devices corresponding to the "virtual" serial ports (take care, +each modem has its configuration and some DLC have dedicated functions, +for example GPS), starting with minor 1 (DLC0 is reserved for the management +of the mux) + +MAJOR=`cat /proc/devices |grep gsmtty | awk '{print $1}` +for i in `seq 1 4`; do + mknod /dev/ttygsm$i c $MAJOR $i +done + +5- use these devices as plain serial ports. +for example, it's possible : +- and to use gnokii to send / receive SMS on ttygsm1 +- to use ppp to establish a datalink on ttygsm2 + +6- first close all virtual ports before closing the physical port. + +Additional Documentation +------------------------ +More practical details on the protocol and how it's supported by industrial +modems can be found in the following documents : +http://www.telit.com/module/infopool/download.php?id=616 +http://www.u-blox.com/images/downloads/Product_Docs/LEON-G100-G200-MuxImplementation_ApplicationNote_%28GSM%20G1-CS-10002%29.pdf +http://www.sierrawireless.com/Support/Downloads/AirPrime/WMP_Series/~/media/Support_Downloads/AirPrime/Application_notes/CMUX_Feature_Application_Note-Rev004.ashx +http://wm.sim.com/sim/News/photo/2010721161442.pdf + +11-03-08 - Eric Bénard - <eric@eukrea.com> diff --git a/Documentation/spinlocks.txt b/Documentation/spinlocks.txt index 178c831b907d..2e3c64b1a6a5 100644 --- a/Documentation/spinlocks.txt +++ b/Documentation/spinlocks.txt @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ to change the variables it has to get an exclusive write lock. The routines look the same as above: - rwlock_t xxx_lock = RW_LOCK_UNLOCKED; + rwlock_t xxx_lock = __RW_LOCK_UNLOCKED(xxx_lock); unsigned long flags; @@ -196,25 +196,3 @@ appropriate: For static initialization, use DEFINE_SPINLOCK() / DEFINE_RWLOCK() or __SPIN_LOCK_UNLOCKED() / __RW_LOCK_UNLOCKED() as appropriate. - -SPIN_LOCK_UNLOCKED and RW_LOCK_UNLOCKED are deprecated. These interfere -with lockdep state tracking. - -Most of the time, you can simply turn: - static spinlock_t xxx_lock = SPIN_LOCK_UNLOCKED; -into: - static DEFINE_SPINLOCK(xxx_lock); - -Static structure member variables go from: - - struct foo bar { - .lock = SPIN_LOCK_UNLOCKED; - }; - -to: - - struct foo bar { - .lock = __SPIN_LOCK_UNLOCKED(bar.lock); - }; - -Declaration of static rw_locks undergo a similar transformation. diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/fs.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/fs.txt index 62682500878a..4af0614147ef 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/fs.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/fs.txt @@ -88,20 +88,19 @@ you might want to raise the limit. file-max & file-nr: -The kernel allocates file handles dynamically, but as yet it -doesn't free them again. - The value in file-max denotes the maximum number of file- handles that the Linux kernel will allocate. When you get lots of error messages about running out of file handles, you might want to increase this limit. -Historically, the three values in file-nr denoted the number of -allocated file handles, the number of allocated but unused file -handles, and the maximum number of file handles. Linux 2.6 always -reports 0 as the number of free file handles -- this is not an -error, it just means that the number of allocated file handles -exactly matches the number of used file handles. +Historically,the kernel was able to allocate file handles +dynamically, but not to free them again. The three values in +file-nr denote the number of allocated file handles, the number +of allocated but unused file handles, and the maximum number of +file handles. Linux 2.6 always reports 0 as the number of free +file handles -- this is not an error, it just means that the +number of allocated file handles exactly matches the number of +used file handles. Attempts to allocate more file descriptors than file-max are reported with printk, look for "VFS: file-max limit <number> diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt index 11d5ceda5bb0..36f007514db3 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt @@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ the different loglevels. - console_loglevel: messages with a higher priority than this will be printed to the console -- default_message_level: messages without an explicit priority +- default_message_loglevel: messages without an explicit priority will be printed with this priority - minimum_console_loglevel: minimum (highest) value to which console_loglevel can be set diff --git a/Documentation/trace/ftrace-design.txt b/Documentation/trace/ftrace-design.txt index dc52bd442c92..79fcafc7fd64 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/ftrace-design.txt +++ b/Documentation/trace/ftrace-design.txt @@ -247,6 +247,13 @@ You need very few things to get the syscalls tracing in an arch. - Support the TIF_SYSCALL_TRACEPOINT thread flags. - Put the trace_sys_enter() and trace_sys_exit() tracepoints calls from ptrace in the ptrace syscalls tracing path. +- If the system call table on this arch is more complicated than a simple array + of addresses of the system calls, implement an arch_syscall_addr to return + the address of a given system call. +- If the symbol names of the system calls do not match the function names on + this arch, define ARCH_HAS_SYSCALL_MATCH_SYM_NAME in asm/ftrace.h and + implement arch_syscall_match_sym_name with the appropriate logic to return + true if the function name corresponds with the symbol name. - Tag this arch as HAVE_SYSCALL_TRACEPOINTS. diff --git a/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt b/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt index 557c1edeccaf..1ebc24cf9a55 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt +++ b/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt @@ -80,11 +80,11 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files: tracers listed here can be configured by echoing their name into current_tracer. - tracing_enabled: + tracing_on: - This sets or displays whether the current_tracer - is activated and tracing or not. Echo 0 into this - file to disable the tracer or 1 to enable it. + This sets or displays whether writing to the trace + ring buffer is enabled. Echo 0 into this file to disable + the tracer or 1 to enable it. trace: @@ -202,10 +202,6 @@ Here is the list of current tracers that may be configured. to draw a graph of function calls similar to C code source. - "sched_switch" - - Traces the context switches and wakeups between tasks. - "irqsoff" Traces the areas that disable interrupts and saves @@ -273,39 +269,6 @@ format, the function name that was traced "path_put" and the parent function that called this function "path_walk". The timestamp is the time at which the function was entered. -The sched_switch tracer also includes tracing of task wakeups -and context switches. - - ksoftirqd/1-7 [01] 1453.070013: 7:115:R + 2916:115:S - ksoftirqd/1-7 [01] 1453.070013: 7:115:R + 10:115:S - ksoftirqd/1-7 [01] 1453.070013: 7:115:R ==> 10:115:R - events/1-10 [01] 1453.070013: 10:115:S ==> 2916:115:R - kondemand/1-2916 [01] 1453.070013: 2916:115:S ==> 7:115:R - ksoftirqd/1-7 [01] 1453.070013: 7:115:S ==> 0:140:R - -Wake ups are represented by a "+" and the context switches are -shown as "==>". The format is: - - Context switches: - - Previous task Next Task - - <pid>:<prio>:<state> ==> <pid>:<prio>:<state> - - Wake ups: - - Current task Task waking up - - <pid>:<prio>:<state> + <pid>:<prio>:<state> - -The prio is the internal kernel priority, which is the inverse -of the priority that is usually displayed by user-space tools. -Zero represents the highest priority (99). Prio 100 starts the -"nice" priorities with 100 being equal to nice -20 and 139 being -nice 19. The prio "140" is reserved for the idle task which is -the lowest priority thread (pid 0). - - Latency trace format -------------------- @@ -491,78 +454,10 @@ x494] <- /root/a.out[+0x4a8] <- /lib/libc-2.7.so[+0x1e1a6] latencies, as described in "Latency trace format". -sched_switch ------------- - -This tracer simply records schedule switches. Here is an example -of how to use it. - - # echo sched_switch > current_tracer - # echo 1 > tracing_enabled - # sleep 1 - # echo 0 > tracing_enabled - # cat trace - -# tracer: sched_switch -# -# TASK-PID CPU# TIMESTAMP FUNCTION -# | | | | | - bash-3997 [01] 240.132281: 3997:120:R + 4055:120:R - bash-3997 [01] 240.132284: 3997:120:R ==> 4055:120:R - sleep-4055 [01] 240.132371: 4055:120:S ==> 3997:120:R - bash-3997 [01] 240.132454: 3997:120:R + 4055:120:S - bash-3997 [01] 240.132457: 3997:120:R ==> 4055:120:R - sleep-4055 [01] 240.132460: 4055:120:D ==> 3997:120:R - bash-3997 [01] 240.132463: 3997:120:R + 4055:120:D - bash-3997 [01] 240.132465: 3997:120:R ==> 4055:120:R - <idle>-0 [00] 240.132589: 0:140:R + 4:115:S - <idle>-0 [00] 240.132591: 0:140:R ==> 4:115:R - ksoftirqd/0-4 [00] 240.132595: 4:115:S ==> 0:140:R - <idle>-0 [00] 240.132598: 0:140:R + 4:115:S - <idle>-0 [00] 240.132599: 0:140:R ==> 4:115:R - ksoftirqd/0-4 [00] 240.132603: 4:115:S ==> 0:140:R - sleep-4055 [01] 240.133058: 4055:120:S ==> 3997:120:R - [...] - - -As we have discussed previously about this format, the header -shows the name of the trace and points to the options. The -"FUNCTION" is a misnomer since here it represents the wake ups -and context switches. - -The sched_switch file only lists the wake ups (represented with -'+') and context switches ('==>') with the previous task or -current task first followed by the next task or task waking up. -The format for both of these is PID:KERNEL-PRIO:TASK-STATE. -Remember that the KERNEL-PRIO is the inverse of the actual -priority with zero (0) being the highest priority and the nice -values starting at 100 (nice -20). Below is a quick chart to map -the kernel priority to user land priorities. - - Kernel Space User Space - =============================================================== - 0(high) to 98(low) user RT priority 99(high) to 1(low) - with SCHED_RR or SCHED_FIFO - --------------------------------------------------------------- - 99 sched_priority is not used in scheduling - decisions(it must be specified as 0) - --------------------------------------------------------------- - 100(high) to 139(low) user nice -20(high) to 19(low) - --------------------------------------------------------------- - 140 idle task priority - --------------------------------------------------------------- - -The task states are: - - R - running : wants to run, may not actually be running - S - sleep : process is waiting to be woken up (handles signals) - D - disk sleep (uninterruptible sleep) : process must be woken up - (ignores signals) - T - stopped : process suspended - t - traced : process is being traced (with something like gdb) - Z - zombie : process waiting to be cleaned up - X - unknown - + overwrite - This controls what happens when the trace buffer is + full. If "1" (default), the oldest events are + discarded and overwritten. If "0", then the newest + events are discarded. ftrace_enabled -------------- @@ -607,10 +502,10 @@ an example: # echo irqsoff > current_tracer # echo latency-format > trace_options # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency - # echo 1 > tracing_enabled + # echo 1 > tracing_on # ls -ltr [...] - # echo 0 > tracing_enabled + # echo 0 > tracing_on # cat trace # tracer: irqsoff # @@ -715,10 +610,10 @@ is much like the irqsoff tracer. # echo preemptoff > current_tracer # echo latency-format > trace_options # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency - # echo 1 > tracing_enabled + # echo 1 > tracing_on # ls -ltr [...] - # echo 0 > tracing_enabled + # echo 0 > tracing_on # cat trace # tracer: preemptoff # @@ -863,10 +758,10 @@ tracers. # echo preemptirqsoff > current_tracer # echo latency-format > trace_options # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency - # echo 1 > tracing_enabled + # echo 1 > tracing_on # ls -ltr [...] - # echo 0 > tracing_enabled + # echo 0 > tracing_on # cat trace # tracer: preemptirqsoff # @@ -1026,9 +921,9 @@ Instead of performing an 'ls', we will run 'sleep 1' under # echo wakeup > current_tracer # echo latency-format > trace_options # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency - # echo 1 > tracing_enabled + # echo 1 > tracing_on # chrt -f 5 sleep 1 - # echo 0 > tracing_enabled + # echo 0 > tracing_on # cat trace # tracer: wakeup # @@ -1140,9 +1035,9 @@ ftrace_enabled is set; otherwise this tracer is a nop. # sysctl kernel.ftrace_enabled=1 # echo function > current_tracer - # echo 1 > tracing_enabled + # echo 1 > tracing_on # usleep 1 - # echo 0 > tracing_enabled + # echo 0 > tracing_on # cat trace # tracer: function # @@ -1180,7 +1075,7 @@ int trace_fd; [...] int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { [...] - trace_fd = open(tracing_file("tracing_enabled"), O_WRONLY); + trace_fd = open(tracing_file("tracing_on"), O_WRONLY); [...] if (condition_hit()) { write(trace_fd, "0", 1); @@ -1631,9 +1526,9 @@ If I am only interested in sys_nanosleep and hrtimer_interrupt: # echo sys_nanosleep hrtimer_interrupt \ > set_ftrace_filter # echo function > current_tracer - # echo 1 > tracing_enabled + # echo 1 > tracing_on # usleep 1 - # echo 0 > tracing_enabled + # echo 0 > tracing_on # cat trace # tracer: ftrace # @@ -1879,9 +1774,9 @@ different. The trace is live. # echo function > current_tracer # cat trace_pipe > /tmp/trace.out & [1] 4153 - # echo 1 > tracing_enabled + # echo 1 > tracing_on # usleep 1 - # echo 0 > tracing_enabled + # echo 0 > tracing_on # cat trace # tracer: function # diff --git a/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.txt b/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.txt index 5f77d94598dd..6d27ab8d6e9f 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.txt +++ b/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.txt @@ -42,11 +42,25 @@ Synopsis of kprobe_events +|-offs(FETCHARG) : Fetch memory at FETCHARG +|- offs address.(**) NAME=FETCHARG : Set NAME as the argument name of FETCHARG. FETCHARG:TYPE : Set TYPE as the type of FETCHARG. Currently, basic types - (u8/u16/u32/u64/s8/s16/s32/s64) and string are supported. + (u8/u16/u32/u64/s8/s16/s32/s64), "string" and bitfield + are supported. (*) only for return probe. (**) this is useful for fetching a field of data structures. +Types +----- +Several types are supported for fetch-args. Kprobe tracer will access memory +by given type. Prefix 's' and 'u' means those types are signed and unsigned +respectively. Traced arguments are shown in decimal (signed) or hex (unsigned). +String type is a special type, which fetches a "null-terminated" string from +kernel space. This means it will fail and store NULL if the string container +has been paged out. +Bitfield is another special type, which takes 3 parameters, bit-width, bit- +offset, and container-size (usually 32). The syntax is; + + b<bit-width>@<bit-offset>/<container-size> + Per-Probe Event Filtering ------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt b/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt index 66f92d1194c1..a4efa0462f05 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt @@ -12,6 +12,10 @@ Controller Drivers (HCD). So, if HCD is buggy, the traces reported by usbmon may not correspond to bus transactions precisely. This is the same situation as with tcpdump. +Two APIs are currently implemented: "text" and "binary". The binary API +is available through a character device in /dev namespace and is an ABI. +The text API is deprecated since 2.6.35, but available for convenience. + * How to use usbmon to collect raw text traces Unlike the packet socket, usbmon has an interface which provides traces @@ -162,39 +166,11 @@ Here is the list of words, from left to right: not machine words, but really just a byte stream split into words to make it easier to read. Thus, the last word may contain from one to four bytes. The length of collected data is limited and can be less than the data length - report in Data Length word. - -Here is an example of code to read the data stream in a well known programming -language: - -class ParsedLine { - int data_len; /* Available length of data */ - byte data[]; - - void parseData(StringTokenizer st) { - int availwords = st.countTokens(); - data = new byte[availwords * 4]; - data_len = 0; - while (st.hasMoreTokens()) { - String data_str = st.nextToken(); - int len = data_str.length() / 2; - int i; - int b; // byte is signed, apparently?! XXX - for (i = 0; i < len; i++) { - // data[data_len] = Byte.parseByte( - // data_str.substring(i*2, i*2 + 2), - // 16); - b = Integer.parseInt( - data_str.substring(i*2, i*2 + 2), - 16); - if (b >= 128) - b *= -1; - data[data_len] = (byte) b; - data_len++; - } - } - } -} + reported in the Data Length word. In the case of an Isochronous input (Zi) + completion where the received data is sparse in the buffer, the length of + the collected data can be greater than the Data Length value (because Data + Length counts only the bytes that were received whereas the Data words + contain the entire transfer buffer). Examples: diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/Zoran b/Documentation/video4linux/Zoran index 699b60e070d2..c40e3bab08fa 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/Zoran +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/Zoran @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Card number: 4 Note: No module for the mse3000 is available yet Note: No module for the vpx3224 is available yet -Note: use encoder=X or decoder=X for non-default i2c chips (see i2c-id.h) +Note: use encoder=X or decoder=X for non-default i2c chips =========================== diff --git a/Documentation/vm/page-types.c b/Documentation/vm/page-types.c index cc96ee2666f2..7445caa26d05 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/page-types.c +++ b/Documentation/vm/page-types.c @@ -32,8 +32,20 @@ #include <sys/types.h> #include <sys/errno.h> #include <sys/fcntl.h> +#include <sys/mount.h> +#include <sys/statfs.h> +#include "../../include/linux/magic.h" +#ifndef MAX_PATH +# define MAX_PATH 256 +#endif + +#ifndef STR +# define _STR(x) #x +# define STR(x) _STR(x) +#endif + /* * pagemap kernel ABI bits */ @@ -152,6 +164,12 @@ static const char *page_flag_names[] = { }; +static const char *debugfs_known_mountpoints[] = { + "/sys/kernel/debug", + "/debug", + 0, +}; + /* * data structures */ @@ -184,7 +202,7 @@ static int kpageflags_fd; static int opt_hwpoison; static int opt_unpoison; -static const char hwpoison_debug_fs[] = "/debug/hwpoison"; +static char hwpoison_debug_fs[MAX_PATH+1]; static int hwpoison_inject_fd; static int hwpoison_forget_fd; @@ -464,21 +482,100 @@ static uint64_t kpageflags_flags(uint64_t flags) return flags; } +/* verify that a mountpoint is actually a debugfs instance */ +static int debugfs_valid_mountpoint(const char *debugfs) +{ + struct statfs st_fs; + + if (statfs(debugfs, &st_fs) < 0) + return -ENOENT; + else if (st_fs.f_type != (long) DEBUGFS_MAGIC) + return -ENOENT; + + return 0; +} + +/* find the path to the mounted debugfs */ +static const char *debugfs_find_mountpoint(void) +{ + const char **ptr; + char type[100]; + FILE *fp; + + ptr = debugfs_known_mountpoints; + while (*ptr) { + if (debugfs_valid_mountpoint(*ptr) == 0) { + strcpy(hwpoison_debug_fs, *ptr); + return hwpoison_debug_fs; + } + ptr++; + } + + /* give up and parse /proc/mounts */ + fp = fopen("/proc/mounts", "r"); + if (fp == NULL) + perror("Can't open /proc/mounts for read"); + + while (fscanf(fp, "%*s %" + STR(MAX_PATH) + "s %99s %*s %*d %*d\n", + hwpoison_debug_fs, type) == 2) { + if (strcmp(type, "debugfs") == 0) + break; + } + fclose(fp); + + if (strcmp(type, "debugfs") != 0) + return NULL; + + return hwpoison_debug_fs; +} + +/* mount the debugfs somewhere if it's not mounted */ + +static void debugfs_mount(void) +{ + const char **ptr; + + /* see if it's already mounted */ + if (debugfs_find_mountpoint()) + return; + + ptr = debugfs_known_mountpoints; + while (*ptr) { + if (mount(NULL, *ptr, "debugfs", 0, NULL) == 0) { + /* save the mountpoint */ + strcpy(hwpoison_debug_fs, *ptr); + break; + } + ptr++; + } + + if (*ptr == NULL) { + perror("mount debugfs"); + exit(EXIT_FAILURE); + } +} + /* * page actions */ static void prepare_hwpoison_fd(void) { - char buf[100]; + char buf[MAX_PATH + 1]; + + debugfs_mount(); if (opt_hwpoison && !hwpoison_inject_fd) { - sprintf(buf, "%s/corrupt-pfn", hwpoison_debug_fs); + snprintf(buf, MAX_PATH, "%s/hwpoison/corrupt-pfn", + hwpoison_debug_fs); hwpoison_inject_fd = checked_open(buf, O_WRONLY); } if (opt_unpoison && !hwpoison_forget_fd) { - sprintf(buf, "%s/unpoison-pfn", hwpoison_debug_fs); + snprintf(buf, MAX_PATH, "%s/hwpoison/unpoison-pfn", + hwpoison_debug_fs); hwpoison_forget_fd = checked_open(buf, O_WRONLY); } } diff --git a/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt b/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt index 2d70d0d95108..97bae3c576c2 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt +++ b/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt @@ -84,8 +84,7 @@ indicate that the page is being managed on the unevictable list. The PG_unevictable flag is analogous to, and mutually exclusive with, the PG_active flag in that it indicates on which LRU list a page resides when -PG_lru is set. The unevictable list is compile-time configurable based on the -UNEVICTABLE_LRU Kconfig option. +PG_lru is set. The Unevictable LRU infrastructure maintains unevictable pages on an additional LRU list for a few reasons: diff --git a/Documentation/workqueue.txt b/Documentation/workqueue.txt index 996a27d9b8db..01c513fac40e 100644 --- a/Documentation/workqueue.txt +++ b/Documentation/workqueue.txt @@ -190,9 +190,9 @@ resources, scheduled and executed. * Long running CPU intensive workloads which can be better managed by the system scheduler. - WQ_FREEZEABLE + WQ_FREEZABLE - A freezeable wq participates in the freeze phase of the system + A freezable wq participates in the freeze phase of the system suspend operations. Work items on the wq are drained and no new work item starts execution until thawed. diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt index 7fbbaf85f5b7..092e596a1301 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt @@ -189,13 +189,13 @@ ACPI PCI - pci=off Don't use PCI - pci=conf1 Use conf1 access. - pci=conf2 Use conf2 access. - pci=rom Assign ROMs. - pci=assign-busses Assign busses - pci=irqmask=MASK Set PCI interrupt mask to MASK - pci=lastbus=NUMBER Scan upto NUMBER busses, no matter what the mptable says. + pci=off Don't use PCI + pci=conf1 Use conf1 access. + pci=conf2 Use conf2 access. + pci=rom Assign ROMs. + pci=assign-busses Assign busses + pci=irqmask=MASK Set PCI interrupt mask to MASK + pci=lastbus=NUMBER Scan up to NUMBER busses, no matter what the mptable says. pci=noacpi Don't use ACPI to set up PCI interrupt routing. IOMMU (input/output memory management unit) @@ -293,11 +293,6 @@ IOMMU (input/output memory management unit) Debugging - oops=panic Always panic on oopses. Default is to just kill the process, - but there is a small probability of deadlocking the machine. - This will also cause panics on machine check exceptions. - Useful together with panic=30 to trigger a reboot. - kstack=N Print N words from the kernel stack in oops dumps. pagefaulttrace Dump all page faults. Only useful for extreme debugging diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/SecurityBugs b/Documentation/zh_CN/SecurityBugs new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d21eb07fe943 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/SecurityBugs @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +Chinese translated version of Documentation/SecurityBugs + +If you have any comment or update to the content, please contact the +original document maintainer directly. However, if you have a problem +communicating in English you can also ask the Chinese maintainer for +help. Contact the Chinese maintainer if this translation is outdated +or if there is a problem with the translation. + +Chinese maintainer: Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> +--------------------------------------------------------------------- +Documentation/SecurityBugs 的中文翻译 + +如果想评论或更新本文的内容，请直接联系原文档的维护者。如果你使用英文 +交流有困难的话，也可以向中文版维护者求助。如果本翻译更新不及时或者翻 +译存在问题，请联系中文版维护者。 + +中文版维护者： 贾威威 Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> +中文版翻译者： 贾威威 Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> +中文版校译者： 贾威威 Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> + + +以下为正文 +--------------------------------------------------------------------- +Linux内核开发者认为安全非常重要。因此，我们想要知道当一个有关于 +安全的漏洞被发现的时候，并且它可能会被尽快的修复或者公开。请把这个安全 +漏洞报告给Linux内核安全团队。 + +1) 联系 + +linux内核安全团队可以通过email<security@kernel.org>来联系。这是 +一组独立的安全工作人员，可以帮助改善漏洞报告并且公布和取消一个修复。安 +全团队有可能会从部分的维护者那里引进额外的帮助来了解并且修复安全漏洞。 +当遇到任何漏洞，所能提供的信息越多就越能诊断和修复。如果你不清楚什么 +是有帮助的信息，那就请重温一下REPORTING-BUGS文件中的概述过程。任 +何攻击性的代码都是非常有用的，未经报告者的同意不会被取消，除非它已经 +被公布于众。 + +2) 公开 + +Linux内核安全团队的宗旨就是和漏洞提交者一起处理漏洞的解决方案直 +到公开。我们喜欢尽快地完全公开漏洞。当一个漏洞或者修复还没有被完全地理 +解，解决方案没有通过测试或者供应商协调，可以合理地延迟公开。然而，我们 +期望这些延迟尽可能的短些，是可数的几天，而不是几个星期或者几个月。公开 +日期是通过安全团队和漏洞提供者以及供应商洽谈后的结果。公开时间表是从很 +短（特殊的，它已经被公众所知道）到几个星期。作为一个基本的默认政策，我 +们所期望通知公众的日期是7天的安排。 + +3) 保密协议 + +Linux内核安全团队不是一个正式的团体，因此不能加入任何的保密协议。 diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmitChecklist b/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmitChecklist new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..951415bbab0c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmitChecklist @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ +Chinese translated version of Documentation/SubmitChecklist + +If you have any comment or update to the content, please contact the +original document maintainer directly. However, if you have a problem +communicating in English you can also ask the Chinese maintainer for +help. Contact the Chinese maintainer if this translation is outdated +or if there is a problem with the translation. + +Chinese maintainer: Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> +--------------------------------------------------------------------- +Documentation/SubmitChecklist ķ + +ۻ±ĵݣֱϵԭĵάߡʹӢ +ѵĻҲİά²ʱ߷ +⣬ϵİάߡ + +İάߣ Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> +İ淭ߣ Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> +İУߣ Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> + + +Ϊ +--------------------------------------------------------------------- +Linuxںύ嵥 +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +һЩں˿ӦĻ飬뿴Լں˲ύ +ܵĸ졣 + +ЩdzDocumentation/SubmittingPatchesĵṩԼ +ύLinuxں˲˵ + +1ʹһô#include/ǸܵǸļ + Ҫ붨/Ǹܵͷļ + +2û߸CONFIGѡ =y=m=n + Ҫб뾯/ ҪӾ/ + +2bͨ allnoconfig, allmodconfig + +2cʹ 0=builddir ɹع + +3ͨʹñؽ빤һЩڶCPUϹ + +4ppc64 һܺõļ齻ĿܣΪѡunsigned long + 64λֵʹá + +5Documentation/CodingStyleļϸ㲹 + ʹòΥ(scripts/checkpatch.pl)Աύ + Ӧõ㲹еΥ档 + +6κθ»߸ĶCONFIGѡܴò˵ + +7еKconfigѡ¶Ҫ˵֡ + +8ѾܽصKconfigϡǺͨõ--½ + +9мԡ + +10ʹ'make checkstack''make namespacecheck'飬Ȼҵ⡣ + ע⣺ջ鲻ȷس⣬κεһڶջʹö512ֽ + Ҫġ + +11kernel-docȫںAPIsļҪ̬ĺǰҲν + ʹ'make htmldocs''make mandocs'kernel-docȻκ + ֵ⡣ + +12ѾͨCONFIG_PREEMPT, CONFIG_DEBUG_PREEMPT, + CONFIG_DEBUG_SLAB, CONFIG_DEBUG_PAGEALLOC, CONFIG_DEBUG_MUTEXES, + CONFIG_DEBUG_SPINLOCK, CONFIG_DEBUG_SPINLOCK_SLEEPԣͬʱ + ʹܡ + +13Ѿʹû߲ʹ CONFIG_SMP CONFIG_PREEMPTִʱ䡣 + +14ӰIO/DiskȵȣѾͨʹû߲ʹ CONFIG_LBDAF ԡ + +15еcodepathsѾʹlockdepùܡ + +16е/proc¼¶ҪļDocumentation/Ŀ¼¡ + +17еں¶¼Documentation/kernel-parameters.txtļС + +18еģ¶MODULE_PARM_DESC()¼ + +19еûռӿڸ¶¼Documentation/ABI/鿴Documentation/ABI/README + ԻøϢıûռӿڵIJӦñʼlinux-api@vger.kernel.org + +20DzǶͨ`make headers_check' + +21Ѿͨslabpage-allocationʧܼ顣鿴Documentation/fault-injection/ + +22¼ԴѾͨ`gcc -W'ʹ"make EXTRA_CFLAGS=-W"롣ܶෳգ + ǶѰ©洦:"warning: comparison between signed and unsigned" + +23ϲ-mmٲԣȷǷͲеһԼVMVFS + ϵͳи仯 + +24еڴ{e.g., barrier(), rmb(), wmb()}ҪԴеһעǶǸʲô + Լԭ + +25κƵIJӣҲҪDocumentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt + +26ĸĴʹκεںAPIskconfigйϵĹܣҪ + ʹصkconfigŹرգ and/or =mѡṩ[ͬһʱ䲻õĶã + ] + + CONFIG_SMP, CONFIG_SYSFS, CONFIG_PROC_FS, CONFIG_INPUT, CONFIG_PCI, + CONFIG_BLOCK, CONFIG_PM, CONFIG_HOTPLUG, CONFIG_MAGIC_SYSRQ, + CONFIG_NET, CONFIG_INET=n (һʹ CONFIG_NET=y) diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmittingPatches b/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmittingPatches index 9a1a6e1ed09e..0f4385a62a49 100644 --- a/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmittingPatches +++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmittingPatches @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/stuff/patch-scripts.tar.gz 将改动拆分，逻辑类似的放到同一个补丁文件里。 -例如，如果你的改动里同时有bug修正和性能优化，那么把这些改动才分到两个或 +例如，如果你的改动里同时有bug修正和性能优化，那么把这些改动拆分到两个或 者更多的补丁文件中。如果你的改动包含对API的修改，并且修改了驱动程序来适 应这些新的API，那么把这些修改分成两个补丁。 @@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ pref("mailnews.display.disable_format_flowed_support", true); 些原因，修正错误，重新提交更新后的改动，是你自己的工作。 Linus不给出任何评论就“丢弃”你的补丁是常见的事情。在系统中这样的事情很 -平常。如果他没有接受你的补丁，也许是由于以下原本： +平常。如果他没有接受你的补丁，也许是由于以下原因： * 你的补丁不能在最新版本的内核上干净的打上。 * 你的补丁在 linux-kernel 邮件列表中没有得到充分的讨论。 * 风格问题（参照第2小节） diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/magic-number.txt b/Documentation/zh_CN/magic-number.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4c4ce853577b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/magic-number.txt @@ -0,0 +1,167 @@ +Chinese translated version of Documentation/magic-number.txt + +If you have any comment or update to the content, please post to LKML directly. +However, if you have problem communicating in English you can also ask the +Chinese maintainer for help. Contact the Chinese maintainer, if this +translation is outdated or there is problem with translation. + +Chinese maintainer: Jia Wei Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> +--------------------------------------------------------------------- +Documentation/magic-number.txt的中文翻译 + +如果想评论或更新本文的内容，请直接发信到LKML。如果你使用英文交流有困难的话，也可 +以向中文版维护者求助。如果本翻译更新不及时或者翻译存在问题，请联系中文版维护者。 + +中文版维护者： 贾威威 Jia Wei Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> +中文版翻译者： 贾威威 Jia Wei Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> +中文版校译者： 贾威威 Jia Wei Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> + +以下为正文 +--------------------------------------------------------------------- +这个文件是有关当前使用的魔术值注册表。当你给一个结构添加了一个魔术值，你也应该把这个魔术值添加到这个文件，因为我们最好把用于各种结构的魔术值统一起来。 + +使用魔术值来保护内核数据结构是一个非常好的主意。这就允许你在运行期检查(a)一个结构是否已经被攻击，或者(b)你已经给一个例行程序通过了一个错误的结构。后一种情况特别地有用---特别是当你通过一个空指针指向结构体的时候。tty源码，例如，经常通过特定驱动使用这种方法并且反复地排列特定方面的结构。 + +使用魔术值的方法是在结构的开始处声明的，如下： + +struct tty_ldisc { + int magic; + ... +}; + +当你以后给内核添加增强功能的时候，请遵守这条规则！这样就会节省数不清的调试时间，特别是一些古怪的情况，例如，数组超出范围并且重新写了超出部分。遵守这个规则，这些情况可以被快速地，安全地避免。 + + Theodore Ts'o + 31 Mar 94 + +给当前的Linux 2.1.55添加魔术表。 + + Michael Chastain + <mailto:mec@shout.net> + 22 Sep 1997 + +现在应该最新的Linux 2.1.112.因为在特性冻结期间，不能在2.2.x前改变任何东西。这些条目被数域所排序。 + + Krzysztof G.Baranowski + <mailto: kgb@knm.org.pl> + 29 Jul 1998 + +更新魔术表到Linux 2.5.45。刚好越过特性冻结，但是有可能还会有一些新的魔术值在2.6.x之前融入到内核中。 + + Petr Baudis + <pasky@ucw.cz> + 03 Nov 2002 + +更新魔术表到Linux 2.5.74。 + + Fabian Frederick + <ffrederick@users.sourceforge.net> + 09 Jul 2003 + +魔术名 地址 结构 所在文件 +=========================================================================== +PG_MAGIC 'P' pg_{read,write}_hdr include/linux/pg.h +CMAGIC 0x0111 user include/linux/a.out.h +MKISS_DRIVER_MAGIC 0x04bf mkiss_channel drivers/net/mkiss.h +RISCOM8_MAGIC 0x0907 riscom_port drivers/char/riscom8.h +SPECIALIX_MAGIC 0x0907 specialix_port drivers/char/specialix_io8.h +HDLC_MAGIC 0x239e n_hdlc drivers/char/n_hdlc.c +APM_BIOS_MAGIC 0x4101 apm_user arch/i386/kernel/apm.c +CYCLADES_MAGIC 0x4359 cyclades_port include/linux/cyclades.h +DB_MAGIC 0x4442 fc_info drivers/net/iph5526_novram.c +DL_MAGIC 0x444d fc_info drivers/net/iph5526_novram.c +FASYNC_MAGIC 0x4601 fasync_struct include/linux/fs.h +FF_MAGIC 0x4646 fc_info drivers/net/iph5526_novram.c +ISICOM_MAGIC 0x4d54 isi_port include/linux/isicom.h +PTY_MAGIC 0x5001 drivers/char/pty.c +PPP_MAGIC 0x5002 ppp include/linux/if_pppvar.h +SERIAL_MAGIC 0x5301 async_struct include/linux/serial.h +SSTATE_MAGIC 0x5302 serial_state include/linux/serial.h +SLIP_MAGIC 0x5302 slip drivers/net/slip.h +STRIP_MAGIC 0x5303 strip drivers/net/strip.c +X25_ASY_MAGIC 0x5303 x25_asy drivers/net/x25_asy.h +SIXPACK_MAGIC 0x5304 sixpack drivers/net/hamradio/6pack.h +AX25_MAGIC 0x5316 ax_disp drivers/net/mkiss.h +ESP_MAGIC 0x53ee esp_struct drivers/char/esp.h +TTY_MAGIC 0x5401 tty_struct include/linux/tty.h +MGSL_MAGIC 0x5401 mgsl_info drivers/char/synclink.c +TTY_DRIVER_MAGIC 0x5402 tty_driver include/linux/tty_driver.h +MGSLPC_MAGIC 0x5402 mgslpc_info drivers/char/pcmcia/synclink_cs.c +TTY_LDISC_MAGIC 0x5403 tty_ldisc include/linux/tty_ldisc.h +USB_SERIAL_MAGIC 0x6702 usb_serial drivers/usb/serial/usb-serial.h +FULL_DUPLEX_MAGIC 0x6969 drivers/net/tulip/de2104x.c +USB_BLUETOOTH_MAGIC 0x6d02 usb_bluetooth drivers/usb/class/bluetty.c +RFCOMM_TTY_MAGIC 0x6d02 net/bluetooth/rfcomm/tty.c +USB_SERIAL_PORT_MAGIC 0x7301 usb_serial_port drivers/usb/serial/usb-serial.h +CG_MAGIC 0x00090255 ufs_cylinder_group include/linux/ufs_fs.h +A2232_MAGIC 0x000a2232 gs_port drivers/char/ser_a2232.h +RPORT_MAGIC 0x00525001 r_port drivers/char/rocket_int.h +LSEMAGIC 0x05091998 lse drivers/fc4/fc.c +GDTIOCTL_MAGIC 0x06030f07 gdth_iowr_str drivers/scsi/gdth_ioctl.h +RIEBL_MAGIC 0x09051990 drivers/net/atarilance.c +RIO_MAGIC 0x12345678 gs_port drivers/char/rio/rio_linux.c +SX_MAGIC 0x12345678 gs_port drivers/char/sx.h +NBD_REQUEST_MAGIC 0x12560953 nbd_request include/linux/nbd.h +RED_MAGIC2 0x170fc2a5 (any) mm/slab.c +BAYCOM_MAGIC 0x19730510 baycom_state drivers/net/baycom_epp.c +ISDN_X25IFACE_MAGIC 0x1e75a2b9 isdn_x25iface_proto_data + drivers/isdn/isdn_x25iface.h +ECP_MAGIC 0x21504345 cdkecpsig include/linux/cdk.h +LSOMAGIC 0x27091997 lso drivers/fc4/fc.c +LSMAGIC 0x2a3b4d2a ls drivers/fc4/fc.c +WANPIPE_MAGIC 0x414C4453 sdla_{dump,exec} include/linux/wanpipe.h +CS_CARD_MAGIC 0x43525553 cs_card sound/oss/cs46xx.c +LABELCL_MAGIC 0x4857434c labelcl_info_s include/asm/ia64/sn/labelcl.h +ISDN_ASYNC_MAGIC 0x49344C01 modem_info include/linux/isdn.h +CTC_ASYNC_MAGIC 0x49344C01 ctc_tty_info drivers/s390/net/ctctty.c +ISDN_NET_MAGIC 0x49344C02 isdn_net_local_s drivers/isdn/i4l/isdn_net_lib.h +SAVEKMSG_MAGIC2 0x4B4D5347 savekmsg arch/*/amiga/config.c +STLI_BOARDMAGIC 0x4bc6c825 stlibrd include/linux/istallion.h +CS_STATE_MAGIC 0x4c4f4749 cs_state sound/oss/cs46xx.c +SLAB_C_MAGIC 0x4f17a36d kmem_cache mm/slab.c +COW_MAGIC 0x4f4f4f4d cow_header_v1 arch/um/drivers/ubd_user.c +I810_CARD_MAGIC 0x5072696E i810_card sound/oss/i810_audio.c +TRIDENT_CARD_MAGIC 0x5072696E trident_card sound/oss/trident.c +ROUTER_MAGIC 0x524d4157 wan_device include/linux/wanrouter.h +SCC_MAGIC 0x52696368 gs_port drivers/char/scc.h +SAVEKMSG_MAGIC1 0x53415645 savekmsg arch/*/amiga/config.c +GDA_MAGIC 0x58464552 gda arch/mips/include/asm/sn/gda.h +RED_MAGIC1 0x5a2cf071 (any) mm/slab.c +STL_PORTMAGIC 0x5a7182c9 stlport include/linux/stallion.h +EEPROM_MAGIC_VALUE 0x5ab478d2 lanai_dev drivers/atm/lanai.c +HDLCDRV_MAGIC 0x5ac6e778 hdlcdrv_state include/linux/hdlcdrv.h +EPCA_MAGIC 0x5c6df104 channel include/linux/epca.h +PCXX_MAGIC 0x5c6df104 channel drivers/char/pcxx.h +KV_MAGIC 0x5f4b565f kernel_vars_s arch/mips/include/asm/sn/klkernvars.h +I810_STATE_MAGIC 0x63657373 i810_state sound/oss/i810_audio.c +TRIDENT_STATE_MAGIC 0x63657373 trient_state sound/oss/trident.c +M3_CARD_MAGIC 0x646e6f50 m3_card sound/oss/maestro3.c +FW_HEADER_MAGIC 0x65726F66 fw_header drivers/atm/fore200e.h +SLOT_MAGIC 0x67267321 slot drivers/hotplug/cpqphp.h +SLOT_MAGIC 0x67267322 slot drivers/hotplug/acpiphp.h +LO_MAGIC 0x68797548 nbd_device include/linux/nbd.h +OPROFILE_MAGIC 0x6f70726f super_block drivers/oprofile/oprofilefs.h +M3_STATE_MAGIC 0x734d724d m3_state sound/oss/maestro3.c +STL_PANELMAGIC 0x7ef621a1 stlpanel include/linux/stallion.h +VMALLOC_MAGIC 0x87654320 snd_alloc_track sound/core/memory.c +KMALLOC_MAGIC 0x87654321 snd_alloc_track sound/core/memory.c +PWC_MAGIC 0x89DC10AB pwc_device drivers/usb/media/pwc.h +NBD_REPLY_MAGIC 0x96744668 nbd_reply include/linux/nbd.h +STL_BOARDMAGIC 0xa2267f52 stlbrd include/linux/stallion.h +ENI155_MAGIC 0xa54b872d midway_eprom drivers/atm/eni.h +SCI_MAGIC 0xbabeface gs_port drivers/char/sh-sci.h +CODA_MAGIC 0xC0DAC0DA coda_file_info include/linux/coda_fs_i.h +DPMEM_MAGIC 0xc0ffee11 gdt_pci_sram drivers/scsi/gdth.h +STLI_PORTMAGIC 0xe671c7a1 stliport include/linux/istallion.h +YAM_MAGIC 0xF10A7654 yam_port drivers/net/hamradio/yam.c +CCB_MAGIC 0xf2691ad2 ccb drivers/scsi/ncr53c8xx.c +QUEUE_MAGIC_FREE 0xf7e1c9a3 queue_entry drivers/scsi/arm/queue.c +QUEUE_MAGIC_USED 0xf7e1cc33 queue_entry drivers/scsi/arm/queue.c +HTB_CMAGIC 0xFEFAFEF1 htb_class net/sched/sch_htb.c +NMI_MAGIC 0x48414d4d455201 nmi_s arch/mips/include/asm/sn/nmi.h + +请注意，在声音记忆管理中仍然有每一些被定义的驱动魔术值。查看include/sound/sndmagic.h来获取他们完整的列表信息。很多OSS声音驱动拥有自己从声卡PCI ID构建的魔术值-他们也没有被列在这里。 + +IrDA子系统也使用了大量的自己的魔术值，查看include/net/irda/irda.h来获取他们完整的信息。 + +HFS是另外一个比较大的使用魔术值的文件系统-你可以在fs/hfs/hfs.h中找到他们。 |